SingleRAN SRAN9.0
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles Issue
13
Date
2015-08-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2015. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
Contents
Contents 1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles.................................................................1 1.1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles.....................................................................................2
2 Overview.........................................................................................................................................7 3 Version Difference........................................................................................................................9 4 Product Configuration................................................................................................................13 4.1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration.......................................................................................................................14 4.1.1 BTS3900 Configuration............................................................................................................................................14 4.1.2 BTS3900A Configuration..........................................................................................................................................16 4.1.3 BTS3900L Configuration..........................................................................................................................................21 4.1.4 BTS3900AL Configuration.......................................................................................................................................23 4.1.5 DBS3900 Configuration............................................................................................................................................25 4.1.6 BTS3900C Configuration..........................................................................................................................................25 4.2 BBU Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................26 4.2.1 BBU Case Configurations.........................................................................................................................................26 4.2.2 BBU Typical Configurations.....................................................................................................................................28 4.2.3 BBU Board Configuration.........................................................................................................................................37 4.2.3.1 GSM BBU Board Configurations...........................................................................................................................37 4.2.3.2 UMTS BBU Board Configurations........................................................................................................................39 4.2.3.3 LTE BBU Board Configurations............................................................................................................................41 4.2.3.4 Common BBU Board Configurations....................................................................................................................43 4.2.3.5 Clock and Transmission Board Configurations......................................................................................................49 4.2.4 CPRI Networking Configuration...............................................................................................................................53 4.3 RF Module Configuration............................................................................................................................................54 4.3.1 RF Module Configuration.........................................................................................................................................54 4.3.2 RF Modules Working at Band 8 (900 MHz).............................................................................................................56 4.3.3 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)...........................................................................................................69 4.3.4 RF Modules Working at Band 5 (850 MHz).............................................................................................................81 4.3.5 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz)...........................................................................................................86 4.3.6 RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)...........................................................................................................92 4.3.7 RF Modules Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz)...........................................................................................................99 4.3.8 RF Modules Working at Band 4 (AWS).................................................................................................................104 Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
Contents
4.3.9 RF Modules Working at Band 12 (700 MHz)......................................................................................................... 106 4.3.10 RF Modules Working at Band 13 (700 MHz)....................................................................................................... 107 4.3.11 RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz)....................................................................................................... 108 4.3.12 RF Modules Working at Band 28 (700 MHz)....................................................................................................... 110 4.4 AAU Configuration....................................................................................................................................................112 4.4.1 AAU3910 Configurations........................................................................................................................................112 4.4.2 AAU3902 Configurations........................................................................................................................................116 4.4.3 AAU3920 Configurations........................................................................................................................................119 4.4.4 AAU3911 Configurations........................................................................................................................................121 4.4.5 AAU3940 Configurations........................................................................................................................................128 4.5 Cabinet Upgrade.........................................................................................................................................................130 4.6 Power Module.............................................................................................................................................................136 4.7 RET Module Configurations......................................................................................................................................147 4.8 Hardware License Configuration................................................................................................................................148 4.8.1 Hardware License Configuration of GSM Base Stations........................................................................................ 148 4.8.2 Hardware License Configuration of UMTS Base Stations.....................................................................................150 4.8.3 Hardware License Configuration of LTE Base Stations.........................................................................................153 4.8.4 License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations................................................................................................158 4.9 Equipment and Product Auxiliary Material Configuration........................................................................................160 4.9.1 Configurations of Auxiliary Materials for Installation............................................................................................160 4.9.2 Auxiliary Materials on the Site................................................................................................................................173
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion................................................................184 5.1 Typical Configurations...............................................................................................................................................185 5.1.1 GSM Mode..............................................................................................................................................................185 5.1.2 UMTS Mode............................................................................................................................................................187 5.1.3 LTE Mode................................................................................................................................................................190 5.1.4 GU Co-Module........................................................................................................................................................193 5.1.5 GU Co-BBU............................................................................................................................................................199 5.1.6 GL Co-Module........................................................................................................................................................203 5.1.7 GL Co-BBU.............................................................................................................................................................208 5.1.8 GUL Triple Mode.................................................................................................................................................... 211 5.1.9 GU Co-BBP............................................................................................................................................................. 227 5.1.10 Typical Configurations of an AAU3910 in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P Scenarios ............................................................228 5.1.11 Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+ (790~960) P+(1710~2690) P Scenarios............................229 5.1.12 Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 1800 A+ (790~960) P+(1710~2690) P Scenarios............................230 5.2 Capacity Expansion Principles...................................................................................................................................232
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
1
1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
Overview This document describes the principles for configuring hardware in 3900 series base stations. Based on specific configuration requirements in this document, the quantities of components to be configured in a base station can be calculated and planned. The exteriors of components and cables in this document are for reference only. The actual exteriors may be different.
Product Version Product Name
Solution Version
Product Version
BTS3900
l SRAN9.0
V100R009C00
BTS3900A BTS3900L
l GBSS16.0 l RAN16.0 l eRAN7.0
BTS3900AL DBS3900 BTS3900C
Intended Audience This document is intended for: l
Technical support engineers
l
System engineers
1.1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
1.1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles This chapter describes changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles.
13 (2015-08-30) This is the thirteenth commercial release. Compared with Issue 12 (2015-05-30), this issue does not add or delete any topics. Compared with Issue 12 (2015-05-30), this issue includes the following changes: Topic
Change Description
4.3.3 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)
Added the MRFUd V6.
4.1.2 BTS3900A Configuration
Added the BTS3900A (Ver.E) cabinet.
4.2.3.1 GSM BBU Board Configurations
Added the GTMUc.
12 (2015-05-30) This is the twelfth commercial release. Compared with Issue 11 (2015-01-30), this issue does not add or delete any topics. Compared with Issue 11 (2015-01-30), this issue includes the following changes: Contents
Change Description
4.4.4 AAU3911 Configurations
Added the 2100MHz AAU3911.
4.3.10 RF Modules Working at Band 13 (700 MHz)
Added the Band 12 and Band 13 RRU3269.
11 (2015-01-30) This is the eleventh commercial release. Compared with Issue 10 (2014-11-15), this issue adds the following topics: 4.4.3 AAU3920 Configurations Compared with Issue 10 (2014-11-15), this issue includes the following changes:
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
Contents
Change Description
4.3.3 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)
Added the 1800MHz RRU3952m.
4.4.4 AAU3911 Configurations
Added the 1800MHz AAU3911.
Compared with Issue 10 (2014-11-15), this issue does not delete any topics.
10 (2014-11-15) This is the tenth commercial release. Compared with Issue 09 (2014-09-30), this issue does not add or delete any topics. Compared with Issue 09 (2014-09-30), this issue includes the following changes: Contents
Change Description
4.3.2 RF Modules Working at Band 8 (900 MHz)
Added the 900MHz RRU3959.
4.3.3 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)
Added the 1800MHz RRU3959w, RRU3953w and RRU3953.
10 (2015-04-30) This is the tenth commercial release. Compared with Issue 09 (2014-09-30), this issue does not add or delete any topics. Compared with Issue 09 (2014-09-30), this issue includes the following changes: Contents
Change Description
4.3.2 RF Modules Working at Band 8 (900 MHz)
Added the 900MHz RRU3959.
4.3.3 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)
Added the 1800MHz RRU3953w and RRU3953.
09 (2014-09-30) This is the nineth commercial release. Compared with Issue 08 (2014-07-30), this issue does not add or delete any topics. Compared with Issue 08 (2014-07-30), this issue includes the following changes: Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
Contents
Change Description
4.2.3.4 Common BBU Board Configurations
Added the UBBPs supported in RAN15.0.
08 (2014-07-30) This is the eighth commercial release. Compared with Issue 07 (2014-04-30), this issue includes the following new topics: l
Spare Part Configurations and its child topics.
Compared with Issue 07 (2014-04-30), this issue includes the following changes: Contents
Change Description
4.9.1 Configurations of Auxiliary Materials for Installation
Changed models of some auxiliary materials.
Compared with Issue 07 (2014-04-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.
07 (2014-04-30) This is the seventh commercial release. Compared with Issue 06 (2014-03-26), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude any topics. Compared with Issue 06 (2014-03-26), this issue does not include any changes.
06 (2014-03-26) This is the sixth commercial release. Compared with Issue 05 (2014-02-28), this issue is reorganized.
05 (2014-02-28) This is the fifth commercial release. Compared with Issue 04 (2014-01-20), this issue does not exclude any topics or include any changes.
04 (2014-01-20) This is the fourth commercial release. Compared with Issue 03 (2013-11-08), this issue includes the following new topics: l Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
4.4.2 AAU3902 Configurations Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
l
4.2.4 CPRI Networking Configuration
l
5.1.9 GU Co-BBP
l
5.1.11 Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+ (790~960) P+(1710~2690) P Scenarios
Compared with Issue 03 (2013-11-08), this issue includes the following changes: Contents
Change Description
4.1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration and its child topics
Added description of the BBU3910 to the configuration list.
4.2.3.4 Common BBU Board Configurations
Added configuration principles for the UBBP.
4.8.4 License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations
Added configuration principles for the multimode co-BBP license.
Compared with Issue 03 (2013-11-08), this issue does not exclude any topics.
03 (2013-11-08) This is the third commercial release. Compared with Issue 02 (2013-08-01), this issue includes the following changes: Contents
Change Description
BTS3900 Configuration List
Added the BTS3900 (Ver.D)+IMB06 configuration.
BTS3900L Configuration List
Added the BTS3900L (Ver.D)+IMB06 configuration.
02 (2013-08-01) This is the second commercial release. Compared with Issue 01 (2013-06-26), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude any topics. Compared with Issue 01 (2013-06-26), this issue includes the following changes:
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Contents
Change Description
4.2.3 BBU Board Configuration and its child topics
Added models.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
01 (2013-06-26) This is the first commercial release. Compared with Draft A (2013-05-20), this issue does not include any new topics or exclude any topics. Compared with Draft A (2013-05-20), this issue includes the following changes. Contents
Change Description
4.3 RF Module Configuration and its child topics
Added the description of the AAU.
4.1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration and its child topics
Added the cabinet configuration list.
Draft A (2013-05-20) This is a draft.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
2 Overview
2
Overview
This document describes the configuration principles for single- and multi-mode 3900 series base stations.
Introduction to 3900 Series Base Stations The 3900 series base stations, which mainly comprises the baseband unit (BBU) and RF modules, use the state-of-the-art multimode technology. A uniform design is applied to various product forms and different installation scenarios. This significantly reduces operators' network construction and operating costs in site acquisition, capacity expansion, and environmental protection. The 3900 series base stations provide various evolution solutions from GSM to UMTS and then to LTE. l
The BBU supports multimode applications. Boards working in different modes can be configured in a BBU so that any two or three among GSM, UMTS, and LTE can share the BBU. In separate-MPT scenarios, one BBU supports two modes, and two BBUs support three modes. In co-MPT scenarios, one BBU supports three modes. NOTE
The BBU in this document includes the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
l
RRUs and RFUs are radio frequency units and support multimode and multi-band applications. – With the SDR technology, RF modules support any two or all three modes among GSM, UMTS and LTE by using different software configurations to meet operators' requirements. RF modules of different modes can be deployed at one base station. Therefore, a base station can work in a single mode or any two or all three modes among GSM, UMTS and LTE. – RF modules working in different frequency bands can also be used together. – High-power RFUs are as follows: MRFUd/MRFUe/WRFUd/WRFUe/CRFUd used together with the BTS3900 (Ver.C/Ver.D/Ver.E) cabinets. – High-power RRUs are as follows: RRU3829/RRU3929/RRU3942/RRU3841/ RRU3961/RRU3832/RRU3839/RRU3939 that are used together with the DCDU-11B/ DCDU-12B. All other RRUs are low-power RRUs. In addition, the 2100 MHz AAU3910 and AWS AAU3910 are also high-power RF modules.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
2 Overview
– Blade RRUs include RRU3936/RRU3938/RRU3939, RRU3824/RRU3826/RRU3838/ RRU3832/RRU3839, and RRU3268/RRU3260.
Description The following table describes the meanings of some symbols and phrases in the document. Table 2-1 Symbol meanings Symbol
Description
&
It is used between different modes in a separate-MPT base station. For example, GSM&UMTS indicates a separate-MPT GSM/UMTS dual-mode base station, which can be shortened to GU.
*
It is used between different modes in a co-MPT base station. For example, GSM*UMTS indicates a co-MPT GSM/UMTS dual-mode base station, which can be shortened to G*U.
+
It is used between different modes for the two BBUs in a separate-MPT base station. For example, GSM&UMTS+LTE indicates a separate-MPT GSM/UMTS/LTE triple-mode base station, which can be shortened to GU+L.
[]
For example, GSM[UMTS*LTE] indicates which can be shorted to G[U*L].
_
The mode following the underscore next to UMPT or UBBP is the actual mode in which the UMPT or UBBP is working. For example, UMPT_GUL is a UMPT working in GUL mode and UBBP_UL is a UBBP working in UL mode.
GU SDR
GSM and UMTS share the same RF modules.
GL SDR
GSM and LTE share the same RF modules.
UL SDR
UMTS and LTE share the same RF modules.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
3 Version Difference
3
Version Difference
SRAN9.0 The single-mode versions for SRAN9.0 are GBSS16.0, RAN16.0, and eRAN7.0. Compared with SRAN8.0, SRAN9.0 includes the following changes: l
Added the AAU3902 working as a 1.8 A module in GL mode.
l
Added the UBBP and BBU3910. A BBU3910 can be installed in the following cabinets: BTS3900 (Ver.D), BTS3900L (Ver.D), BTS3900A (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D), IMB03, OMB (Ver.C) (applies to DBS3900 and BTS3900C (Ver.C)), and BTS3900AL (Ver.A).
l
Added the Cloud BB technology.
l
Added the multimode baseband license.
l
Added the ODM and OFD.
SRAN8.1 The single-mode versions for SRAN8.1 are GBSS15.1, RAN15.1, and eRAN6.1. Compared with SRAN8.0, SRAN8.1 includes the following changes: l
Added the following RF modules: EGSM/PGSM/1800 MHz RRU3938 and enhanced EGSM/PGSM/1800 MHz MRFUd.
l
Added the RRU3268 (800 MHz) for eRAN6.1.
l
Added the AAU3902 working as a 1.8 A module in LO mode.
l
Added the GULT quadruple mode.
SRAN8.0 The single-mode versions for SRAN8.0 are GBSS15.0, RAN15.0, and eRAN6.0. Compared with SRAN7.0, SRAN8.0 includes the following changes: l
Added the following BBU boards: UBRIb, UMPTb1, UBBP(UMTS baseband unit) and LBBPd3 as well as UTRPa (UMTS main control and transmission unit).
l
Added the AAU3910, which can serve as an active unit of 1800 MHz, 2100 MHz, 2600 MHz, or AWS.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
3 Version Difference
l
Added the AAU3902 (2100 MHz).
l
Added the RRU3926 in GL mode.
l
Added the number of HSPA UEs that can be carried by a WBBP.
l
Added the GU/GL/UL/GUL co-MPT configurations.
l
Added the following RF modules: RRU3260 (2.6 GHz), RRU3268 (2.6 GHz), RRU3939 (1800 MHz), and RRU3936 (850 MHz and 1900 MHz).
l
Added the AAU3910, which can serve as an active unit of 1800 MHz, 2100 MHz, 2600 MHz, or AWS in SRAN8.0.
l
Added the RRU3808 (AWS) in UL mode.
l
Added configurations of the Lampsite solution.
SRAN7.0 The single-mode versions for SRAN7.0 are GBSS14.0, RAN14.0, and eRAN3.0. Compared with SRAN6.0, SRAN7.0 includes the following changes: l
Added BBU boards (UTRPc, box interconnection port, UTRPa, UCIU, UMPTa1, WBBPf, LBBPd, and UMPTa2) and RF modules (2600 MHz LRFUe, E900 MHz MRFUe, AWS RRU3841, 850 MHz RRU3942, AWS CRFUd, and UMPTb1 (only for UMTS)).
l
Added the following LTE hardware licenses: Resource Block License, BB Receive Channel License, BB Transmit Channel, RF Transmit Channel, and RF Receive Channel.
l
Added the UMTS NodeB Signaling Capacity License UMTS hardware.
l
Added the configurations for connecting dual-mode SDR RF modules across BBUs by BBU interconnection.
l
Added the following GUL triple-mode configurations: GSM&UMTS+LTE (GSM), GSM<E+UMTS (GSM), GSM&UMTS+UMTS<E, and GSM&UMTS +UMTS<E (GSM). NOTE
In triple-mode configurations, LTE (GSM)/UMTS (GSM) indicates that LTE or UMTS uses one BBU and shares SDR RF modules with GSM in the other BBU. Therefore, the SDR RF modules must be connected across BBUs in a star topology to support GL or GU. GSM is contained in brackets because a GTMU board is not configured in the BBU which is only used by LTE or UMTS.
l
Added configurations for GUL triple-mode co-transmission.
l
Added configurations for GUL triple-mode common clock.
l
Added the RRU3942 (1900 MHz) in UL mode.
l l
The BTS3900 (Ver.D) AC cabinet can be stacked on an IMS06 which houses transmission equipment or 92 Ah storage batteries.
eRAN2.2 eRAN2.2 is an LTE only version. Compared with eRAN2.1, eRAN2.2 includes the following changes: l
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Added the UL 2x4 MU-MIMO and DL 4x4 MIMO features, which are introduced in eRAN2.2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
l
3 Version Difference
Added dual-carrier configurations.
SRAN6.0 The single-mode versions for SRAN6.0 are GBSS13.0, RAN13.0, and eRAN2.1. Compared with SRAN5.0, SRAN6.0 includes the following changes: l
Added the following hardware: Band13 700 MHz RF modules, Band 20800 MHz full-band RF modules, Band5 850 MHz MRFU V2, P900 MHz/E900 MHz MRFUd, Band2 1800 MHz MRFUd, E900 MHz RRU3929, 900 MHz RRU3928, 1800 MHz RRU3929, 1800 MHz RRU3928, 800 MHz LRFUe, 2600 MHz RRU3240, 1900 MHz RRU3942, 900 MHz PGSM/1800 MHz/900 MHz EGSM RRU3926, P900 MHz RRU3929, 2100 MHz WRFUe, 900 MHz PGSM/1800 MHz/900 MHz EGSM RRU3936, 2100 MHz 100 W WRFUa, 2600 MHz RRU3221, 2100 MHz 80 W WRFU (enhanced), 2100 MHz RRU3839, AWS RRU3832, EGSM/PGSM/1800 MHz RRU3938, MRFUd (enhanced), and 1800 MHz RRU3939.
l
Added the maximum configuration of six UMTS baseband processing boards.
l
Added a cabinet, which is required by the MRFUd, WRFUd, LRFUe, and MRFUe. A single new cabinet supports GUL triple-mode configurations including GSM&UMTS+LTE and GSM<E+UMTS.
l
Added the following SRAN6.0 dual-mode features: GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing and 2.0 MHz Central Frequency Point Separation between GSM and UMTS Mode.
l
Added the following RAN13.0 features: E-DPCCH Boosting, DC-HSDPA+MIMO, Dualthreshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation, NodeB Internal Firewall, Anti-interference Scheduling for HSUPA, Traffic-based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier in Multi-carrier, Multi-carrier Switch off Based on QoS, Intelligent Power Management, Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell, CQI Adjustment, and MIMO prime.
l
Added the following eRAN2.1 features: TTI Bundling, LoCation Services (LCS), and Cell Outage Detection and Compensation.
l
Added the GSM high power 80 W license.
l
Added the BTS3900 (AC) Ver.D and BTS3900L (AC) Ver.D cabinets, which apply to 220 V AC scenarios.
SRAN5.0 The single-mode versions used with SRAN5.0 are GBSS12.0, RAN12.0, and eRAN2.0. Compared with SRAN3.0, SRAN5.0 includes the following changes: l
Added the following hardware: WBBPd (UMTS baseband board), UTRPb4 (GSM transmission board), RRU3806 of 2100 MHz (80 W), RRU3808 of AWS, RRU3824 of 2100 MHz, RRU3826 of 2100 MHz, RRU3838 of 2100 MHz, RRU3832 of 2100 MHz, WRFUd of 2100 MHz, RRU3828 of 2100 MHz, and RRU3829 of 2100 MHz.
l
Added the following SRAN5.0 dual-mode features: Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing and Bandwidth Sharing of MBTS in Multi-mode Co-Transmission.
l
Added the following features, which are introduced in RAN12.0: Interference Cancellation (IC), Frequency Domain Equalization (FDE), UL L2 Enhanced, DL 64QAM+MIMO, UL 16QAM, DC-HSDPA, and Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
l
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
3 Version Difference
Added the GSM high power 60 W license.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
4
Product Configuration
This chapter describes the principles for configuring various components in 3900 series base stations. 3900 series base stations use modular design. A macro base station consists of a cabinet, a BBU, and RF modules. Its minimum configuration includes the cabinet as well as the minimum configuration of the following components: baseband processing units, main control and transmission units, and RF modules. A distributed base station consists of a baseband processing unit and an RF unit. Its minimum configuration includes the minimum configuration of the following components: baseband processing units, main control and transmission units, and RF modules. The corresponding boards or license can be added to expand the baseband processing capacity, RF modules, and transmission ports, which implement smooth capacity expansion. 4.1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration 4.2 BBU Configuration 4.3 RF Module Configuration 4.4 AAU Configuration 4.5 Cabinet Upgrade 4.6 Power Module 4.7 RET Module Configurations 4.8 Hardware License Configuration 4.9 Equipment and Product Auxiliary Material Configuration
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
4.1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration 4.1.1 BTS3900 Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a BTS3900 site.
BTS3900 Configuration Principles The following table lists the BTS3900 configuration principles. Table 4-1 BTS3900 configuration principles Single/ Dual/ TripleMode Base Station
Maximu m Number of Cabinet s
Maxi mum Num ber of BBUs
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Note:
Single- or dual-mode base station
2
1
l If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.
-
SeparateMPT triplemode base station
2
l If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs are supported. 2
If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported. If RFUs and RRUs are configured: l A Ver.B or Ver.C cabinet supports a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs. The DCDU supplying power to RRUs must be installed on a wall outside the cabinet.
For highpower RRUs, see2 Overview.
l A site that uses Ver.D cabinets supports a maximum of 12 RFUs, 6 high-power RRUs, and 3 low-power RRUs. The DCDU supplying power to RRUs can be installed in the BTS3900 cabinet. Co-MPT triple-mode base station
2
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
1
If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.
-
If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs are supported.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
NOTE
l A single Ver.B or Ver.C AC cabinet can house a maximum of one BBU. A single Ver.D cabinet can house a maximum of two BBUs. l If the MRFUd, WRFUd, WRFUe, or MRFUe is configured, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be used. l If RFUs and RRUs are configured and the RRUs are of high power, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be used. l The BTS3900 (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) AC cabinet and +24 V DC BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet can neither be configured as a separate-MPT triple-mode base station nor be configured with RFUs and RRUs together. The Ver.D AC cabinet can be configured with a maximum of 6 RFUs and 9 RRUs.
BTS3900 Configuration List The following table lists BTS3900 cabinets and their internal devices. Table 4-2 Configuration list External Model
Description
Configuration Principle
WD2B48RACK00
BTS3900 Cabinet (DC -48 V)
Indoor macro cabinet BTS3900 (-48 V DC), which houses the BBU case and RFUs and applies to the AC scenarios with backup power.
WD2B48RACK03
BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver.C, DC -48V)
WD2P048CAB10
BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver.D, DC -48V)
-48 V DC BTS3900 indoor macro base station, which houses BBUs and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC scenarios with backup power and 110 V AC scenarios with or without backup power. One piece of DC cabinet can be configured in 220 V AC scenarios without backup power when the site needs to be configured with 7 to 11 RFUs.
WD2PACRACK00
BTS3900 Cabinet (AC 220V/110V)
WD2BACRACK01
BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver.C, AC 220V/ 110V)
WD2P220CAB00
BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver.D, 220VAC)
220 V AC or 110 V AC indoor macro cabinet for housing the power module, BBUs, and RFUs
220 V AC indoor macro cabinet, consisting of a BTS3900 cabinet and an IMS06 stacked together. The IMS06 can house a 5 U AC power device. It is supported from SRAN6.0 onwards. In 220 V AC scenarios without backup power, one piece is configured by default. When two cabinets need to be configured, the site can be configured with one AC cabinet and one DC cabinet.
WD2M048BBU01
BBU Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUc. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power.
WD2M048BBU10
BBU3910 Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUd and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
NOTE
When the BTS3900 is stacked on two IMS06s, an EPU05A and a group of batteries (92 Ah) or an EPU05A and two transmission devices can be installed.
4.1.2 BTS3900A Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a BTS3900A site.
BTS3900A configuration principles The following table lists the BTS3900A configuration principles. Table 4-3 BTS3900A configuration principles Single/ Dual/ TripleMode Base Station
Maximum Number of Cabinets
Maxi mum Numb er of BBUs
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Remarks
Single- or dual-mode base station
l A BTS3900A site can uses Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets supports a maximum of two groups of APM30H+RFC.
1
l If only RFUs need to be configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.
For high-power RRUs, see 2 Overview.
SeparateMPT triplemode base station Co-MPT triple-mode base station
l A BTS3900A site that uses Ver.D cabinets supports a maximum of one APM30H and two RFCs. l The BTS3900A (Ver.E) supports a maximum of one APM30H and two RFCs.
2
1
l If RFUs and RRUs need to be configured: l A BTS3900A site that uses Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets supports a maximum of 6 RFUs and 6 RRUs. l A BTS3900A site that uses Ver.D cabinets support a maximum of 6 RFUs, 6 high-power RRUs, and 3 low-power RRUs. l A BTS3900A site using Ver.E cabinets supports a maximum of 6 RFUs, 6 high-power RRUs, and 9 low-power RRUs, or supports 12 RFUs and 9 low-power RRUs.
NOTE
l If the MRFUd, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFUe, or MRFUe is configured, a Ver.C, Ver.D or Ver.E cabinet must be used. l When RFUs and RRUs are configured and the RRUs are of high power, a Ver.C, Ver.D or Ver.E cabinet must be used.
BTS3900A Configuration List The following table lists the BTS3900A cabinets and their internal devices. Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-4 Configuration list External Model
Description
Function
WD2P022APM03
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, AC 220 V)
Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with 220 V AC power
WD2P022APM04
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, AC 220 V)
WD2P022APM05
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, AC 220 V)
By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 1600 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.
Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with 220 V AC power, with a heat exchanger By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 1600 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. The cabinet of the 05/06 type is used in cold areas with a temperature below -20°C.
WD2P022APM06
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, AC 220 V)
WD2P011APM03
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, AC 110V)
Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with 110 V AC power
WD2B048APM03
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, -48 V)
Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with -48 V DC power
WD2B048APM04
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, DC -48 V)
WD2B048APM07
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, DC -48 V)
WD2B048APM06
Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, DC -48 V)
WD2B226RFU03
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 1600 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.
Outdoor cabinet (APM30) for a BTS3900A site supplied with -48 V DC power, with a heat exchanger For a cabinet with heating film, the customer needs to provide independent power supply for the heating film.
BTS3900A cabinet, used for housing RFUs
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
WD2B226RFU04
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet
WD2B116RFU03
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet
Outdoor macro cabinet housing RFUs for a BTS3900A site supplied with 110 V AC power
WD2M048BBU01
BBU Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUc. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power.
WD2M048BBU10
BBU3910 Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUd and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.
WD2P022CAB00
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C, AC 220 V)
220 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It contains an APM30 and an RFC.
WD2P022CAB01
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C, AC 220 V)
In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if highpower RRUs are required. In an outdoor macro base stations with a 220 V power supply, this item needs to be configured and a site supports a maximum of two cabinets. One BTS3900A cabinet consists of one APM30 cabinet and one RFC cabinet. Two BTS3900A cabinets are required in a triple-mode scenario. By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. The cabinet of the 01 type is used in cold areas with a temperature below -20°C.
WD2P011CAB00
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C, AC 110 V)
110 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It contains an APM30 and an RFC. In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if highpower RRUs are required. In 110 V DC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes. By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.
WD2P048CAB00
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C, DC -48 V)
WD2P048CAB01
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C, DC -48 V)
-48 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It contains an APM30 and an RFC. In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if highpower RRUs are required. In -48 V DC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes. The cabinet of the 01 type is used in cold areas with a temperature below -20°C.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
WD2B226RFU05
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet (Ver.C)
BTS3900A cabinet, used for housing RFUs l When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured. l This item is configured when an RFU cabinet is required. l In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required.
WD2P022CAB21
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.D, AC 220 V)
220 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It contains an APM30 and an RFC. l When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured. l In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. l In 220 V DC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes. By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.
WD2P022CAB22
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.D, AC 220 V)
110 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It contains an APM30 and an RFC. l When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured. l In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. l In 110 V DC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes. By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.
WD2P011CAB23
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.D, AC 110 V)
110 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It contains an APM30 and an RFC. l When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured. l In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. l In 110 V DC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes. By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
WD2P048CAB24
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.D, DC -48 V)
-48 V BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It contains an APM30 and an RFC. l When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured. l In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. In -48 V DC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes.
WD2P048CAB25
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.D, DC -48 V)
When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured. l In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required. l In -48 V DC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of two outdoor macro cabinets. The two cabinets include one APM30 and one RFC, which support triple modes.
WD2B226RFU11
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet (Ver.D, DC -48 V)
BTS3900A cabinet, used for housing RFUs l When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured. l This item is configured when an RFU cabinet is required. l In a newly deployed site, this item needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are required.
WD2P022CAB03
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.E, 220 V AC)
220 V AC BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It contains an APM30 and an RFC. l A site supports a maximum of one cabinet. When more than six RFUs are used, one cabinet for stacked installation and one RFC are required. A cabinet contains two PSUs (AC/DC) by default. When the total power consumption of a single cabinet exceeds 3000 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.
WD2P011CAB25
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.E, 110 V AC)
110 V AC BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It contains an APM30 and an RFC. l A site supports a maximum of one cabinet. When more than six RFUs are used, one cabinet for stacked installation and one RFC are required. A cabinet contains two PSUs (AC/DC) by default. When the total power consumption of a single cabinet exceeds 3000 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
WD2P048CAB26
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.E, -48 V DC)
l -48 V DC BTS3900A outdoor cabinet for stacked installation. It contains an APM30 and an RFC. – At newly deployed sites, it needs to be configured when high-power RRUs are used. A site supports a maximum of one cabinet. When more than six RFUs are used, one cabinet for stacked installation and one RFC are required.
WD2P048CAB28
WD2B486RFU09
BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.E, -48 V DC)
When high-power RFUs are used, this item must be configured.
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet (Ver.E, -48 V DC)
BTS3900A outdoor macro cabinet used for housing RFUs
l A site supports a maximum of two cabinets. When more than six RFUs are used, one cabinet for stacked installation and one RFC are required.
l The cabinet is configured when no APM30 is required. l At newly deployed sites, it needs to be configured when highpower RRUs are used.
4.1.3 BTS3900L Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a BTS3900L site.
BTS3900L configuration principles The following table lists the BTS3900L configuration principles. Table 4-5 BTS3900L configuration principles Single/ Dual/ TripleMode Base Station
Maximu m Number of Cabinets
Maximu m Number of BBUs
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Note:
Single- or dual-mode base station
1
1
l If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.
-
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
l If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs are supported.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Single/ Dual/ TripleMode Base Station
Maximu m Number of Cabinets
Maximu m Number of BBUs
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Note:
SeparateMPT triplemode base station
1
2
l If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.
For highpower RRUs, see 2 Overview.
Co-MPT triplemode base station
1
l If RFUs and RRUs need to be configured: A BTS3900L site that uses Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets supports a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs. A BTS3900L site that uses Ver.D cabinets supports a maximum of 12 RFUs, 6 high-power RRUs, and 3 low-power RRUs. l If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.
1
-
l If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs are supported.
NOTE
l If the MRFUd, WRFUd, WRFUe, or MRFUe is configured, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be used. l If RFUs and RRUs are configured and the RRUs are of high power, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be used.
BTS3900L Configuration List The following table lists BTS3900L cabinets and their internal devices. Table 4-6 Configuration list External Model
Description
Function
WD2B48RACK01
BTS3900L Cabinet (DC -48 V)
-48 V DC BTS3900L (Ver.B) indoor macro cabinet, which houses BBUs and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios with or without backup power.
WD2B48RACK04
BTS3900L Cabinet (Ver.C, DC -48 V)
-48 V DC BTS3900L (Ver.C) indoor macro cabinet, which houses BBUs and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios with or without backup power.
WD2P048CABL1
BTS3900L Cabinet (Ver.D, DC -48 V)
-48 V DC BTS3900L (Ver.D) indoor macro cabinet, which houses BBUs and RFUs and applies to the 220 V AC scenarios with backup power and 110 V AC scenarios with or without backup power.
WD2P220CAB01
BTS3900L Cabinet (Ver.D, AC 220 V)
220 V AC BTS3900L (Ver.D) indoor macro base station, which consists of a BTS3900L cabinet stacked on an IMS06. It houses the EPU05A, BBUs, and RFUs. It is supported from SRAN6.0 onwards.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
WD2M048BBU01
BBU Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUc. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power.
WD2M048BBU10
BBU3910 Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUd and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.
4.1.4 BTS3900AL Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a BTS3900AL site.
BTS3900AL configuration principles The following table lists the BTS3900AL configuration principles. Table 4-7 BTS3900AL configuration principles Single/ Dual/ TripleMode Base Station
Maximum Number of Cabinets
Maxi mum Num ber of BBUs
Maximum Number of RF Modules
Note:
Single- or dual-mode base station
A maximum of two BTS3900AL cabinets (1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet)
1
If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 18 RFUs are supported.
For highpower RRUs, see 2 Overview.
SeparateMPT triplemode base station Co-MPT triple-mode base station
If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 9 RFUs and 9 RRUs are supported. 2
If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 18 RFUs are supported. If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 9 RFUs and 12 RRUs are supported.
1
If only RFUs are configured, a maximum of 18 RFUs are supported. If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a maximum of 9 RFUs and 9 RRUs are supported.
NOTE
If a site is configured with two BTS3900AL cabinets. the two cabinets must be installed side by side with the BTS3900AL DC cabinet on the right.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
BTS3900AL Configuration List The following table lists BTS3900AL cabinets and their internal devices. Table 4-8 Configuration list External Model
Descriptio n
Function
WD2P048BBU00
BBU Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUc. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power.
WD2P3910BBU0
BBU3910 Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUd and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.
WD5P0ACCAB00
BTS3900A L Cabinet (AC 220 V/ 110 V)
BTS3900AL 220 V/110 V outdoor cabinet In 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of one AC outdoor macro cabinet and one DC outdoor macro cabinet. By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs and 2 BBUs.
WD5P0ACCAB01
BTS3900A L Cabinet (AC 220 V/ 110 V)
BTS3900AL 220 V/110 V outdoor cabinet, used in cold areas In 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios, a site supports a maximum of one AC outdoor macro cabinet and one DC outdoor macro cabinet. By default, this item contains two PSUs (AC/DC). When the total power consumption of a single cabinet is greater than 2900 W, an additional PSU (AC/DC) is required. Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs and 2 BBUs.
WD5P0DCCAB00
BTS3900A L Cabinet (DC -48 V)
BTS3900AL -48 V DC outdoor cabinet When a site is configured with more than 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet or two BTS3900AL DC cabinets can be configured to support a maximum of 18 RFUs. The DC cabinet is powered by the AC cabinet. Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs.
WD5P0DCCAB01
BTS3900A L Cabinet (DC -48 V)
BTS3900AL -48 V DC outdoor cabinet, used in cold areas When a site is configured with more than 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet or two BTS3900AL DC cabinets can be configured to support a maximum of 18 RFUs. The DC cabinet is powered by the AC cabinet. Each cabinet is configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
4.1.5 DBS3900 Configuration The OMB cabinet is an outdoor power cabinet and provides no backup power. It is used for the DBS3900 and cannot be configured with an APM30 series power cabinet.
OMB Configurations The following table lists the cabinets used by the OMB and their components. Table 4-9 Configuration list External Model
Description
Function
QWMB0OMBAC00
OMB Cabinet (Ver.C, 220/110V AC)
This is an OMB (Ver.C) cabinet supplied with 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power. Each cabinet supports a maximum of six RRUs and one BBU. Each site can be configured with a maximum of one cabinet.
QWMB0OMBDC00
OMB Cabinet (Ver.C, -48V DC)
This is an OMB (Ver.C) cabinet supplied with -48 V DC power. Each cabinet supports a maximum of six RRUs and one BBU. Each site can be configured with a maximum of one cabinet.
WD2MR4850G00
PSU module (AC/DC)
This is a power supply module. One PSU is configured when the OMB (Ver.C) AC cabinet uses four to six DC RRUs.
4.1.6 BTS3900C Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a BTS3900C site.
BTS3900C Configuration Principles The following table lists the BTS3900C configuration principles. Table 4-10 BTS3900C configuration principles Cabinet Configuration
Maximu m Number of BBUs
RF Module Configuration
Remarks
BTS3900C (Ver.C), consisting of an OMB (Ver.C) and an RRU subrack
1
Only one RRU can be configured.
It applies to a single- or multi-mode base station.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
BTS3900C Configuration List The following table lists the cabinets used by the BTS3900C and their internal devices. Table 4-11 Configuration list External Model
Description
Function
QWMB0OMBAC00
OMB Cabinet (Ver.C, AC 220 V/110 V)
This is an OMB (Ver.C) cabinet supplied with 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power.
QWMB0OMBDC00
OMB Cabinet (Ver.C, DC -48 V)
OMB (Ver.C) supplied with -48 V DC power
WD2M048BBU01
BBU Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUc. The UPEUc can provide 360 W power.
WD2M048BBU10
BBU3910 Box
Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units, containing one UPEUd and FANd. The UPEUd can provide 650 W power.
4.2 BBU Configuration This section describes the number of BBUs configured in various types of base stations, the number of different types of boards in the BBU, and the slot assignment principles.
4.2.1 BBU Case Configurations The BBU is a mandatory component in 3900 series base stations. Different principles apply to the BBU configuration in different types of base stations. The following table lists the principles for configuring BBU cases in single-, dual-, and triplemode base stations. Table 4-12 BBU Case Configuration Principle Single/Dual/ Triple-Mode Base Station
Configured Mode
BBU Case Configuration Principle
Single-mode base station
GSM
One BBU is configured.
UMTS
One BBU is configured.
LTE
One BBU is configured.
GU
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a GTMU/UMPT_G and a WMPT/UMPT_U.
Dual-mode base station
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
Single/Dual/ Triple-Mode Base Station
Separate-MPT triple-mode base station
4 Product Configuration
Configured Mode
BBU Case Configuration Principle
G*U
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a UMPT in G*U (coMPT) mode.
GL
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a GTMU/UMPT_G and an LMPT/UMPT_L.
G*L
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a UMPT in G*L (coMPT) mode.
UL
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a WMPT/UMPT_U and an LMPT/UMPT_L.
U*L
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a UMPT in U*L (coMPT) mode.
UT
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a WMPT/UMPT_U and an LMPT/UMPT_T.
L*T
The two modes share one BBU, which is configured with a UMPT in L*T (coMPT) mode.
GU+L
Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS, and the other BBU is used by LTE.
GL+U
Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and LTE, and the other BBU is used by UMTS.
GU+UL
Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS, and the other BBU is shared by UMTS and LTE.
GU+L(G)
Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS, and the other BBU is used by LTE. The two BBUs are interconnected.
GL+U(G)
Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and LTE, and the other BBU is used by UMTS. The two BBUs are interconnected.
GU+UL(G)
Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS, and the other BBU is shared by UMTS and LTE. The two BBUs are interconnected.
G[U*L]
The three modes share one BBU. The UMTS and LTE modes share a UMPT, and the GSM mode is supported by a GTMU.
G[L*T]
Three modes share one BBU. The LTE FDD and LTE TDD modes share a UMPT, and the GSM mode is supported by a GTMU.
U[L*T]
Three modes share one BBU. The LTE FDD and LTE TDD modes share a UMPT, and the UMTS mode is supported by a WMPT/UMPT_U.
G[U*T]
Three modes share one BBU. The UMTS and LTE TDD modes share a UMPT, and the GSM mode is supported by a GTMU.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Single/Dual/ Triple-Mode Base Station
Configured Mode
BBU Case Configuration Principle
Co-MPT triple-mode base station
G*U*L
The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU.
G*U*T
The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU.
G*L*T
The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU.
U*L*T
The three modes share one UMPT in one BBU. U*L*T
Quadruplemode base station with coMPT
G*U*L*T
The four modes share one UMPT in one BBU.
GU+[L*T] (G)
Two BBUs are configured. One BBU is shared by GSM and UMTS, and the other BBU is shared by LTE FDD and LTE TDD.
4.2.2 BBU Typical Configurations Model
Descript ion
Functio n
Maximu m Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD2M048BBU01
BBU3900 Box
BBU case
BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L/ BTS3900 AL/ DBS390 0: 2
Optional. A maximum of two BBUs can be configured. In separate-MPT scenarios, two BBUs must be configured to support triple modes. In coMPT scenarios, one BBU can support triple modes. It is a 2 U high and 19" wide standardized subrack, which provides eight slots for housing boards. These boards include a UPEUc that provides power of 360 W.
Used for housing baseband processin g boards
BTS3900 C: 1
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descript ion
Functio n
Maximu m Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD2M048BBU10
BBU3910 Box
BBU case
BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L/ BTS3900 AL/ DBS390 0: 2
Optional. A maximum of two BBUs can be configured. In separate-MPT scenarios, two BBUs must be configured to support triple modes. In coMPT or hybrid-MPT scenarios, one BBU can support triple modes. It is a 2 U high and 19" wide standardized subrack, which provides eight slots for housing boards. These boards include a UPEUd that provides power of 650 W and a FANd.
Used for housing baseband processin g boards
BTS3900 C: 1
The BBU is a baseband control unit. It provides a maximum of eight slots for boards. In separateMPT scenarios, the BBU can work in GO, UO, LO, GU, GL, or UL mode. To achieve the GUL triple-mode application, two BBUs are required. In co-MPT scenarios, only one BBU is required to achieve the GUL triple-mode application. In SRAN6.0, the BBU supports the GSM& WCDMA+LTE and GSM<E+WCDMA configurations. In GSM&WCDMA+LTE configuration, GSM and UMTS share one BBU3900 and LTE uses the other BBU3900. In GSM<E+WCDMA configuration, GSM and LTE share one BBU3900 and WCDMA uses the other BBU3900. SRAN7.0 supports the following triple-mode configurations: GSM&WCDMA+LTE (GSM), GSM<E+WCDMA (GSM), GSM&WCDMA+WCDMA<E, and GSM&WCDMA +WCDMA<E (GSM). In GU+L (GSM) mode, GSM and UMTS use one BBU3900 and LTE uses the other BBU3900; SDR RF modules are connected to the two BBUs to support GL dualmode. In GL+U (GSM) mode, GSM and LTE use one BBU3900 and UMTS uses the other BBU; SDR RF modules are connected to the two BBUs to support UL dual-mode.In GU+UL mode, GSM and UMTS use one BBU3900, and UMTS and LTE use the other BBU3900. In GU+UL (GSM) mode, GSM and UMTS use one BBU3900, and UMTS and LTE use the other BBU3900; SDR RF modules are connected to the two BBUs to support GL dual-mode. In SRAN7.0, GU+L (GSM) and GL+U (GSM) configurations are introduced, and SDR RF modules are connected to two BBU3900s, which requires BBU3900 interconnection. In this case, the two BBU3900s are interconnected by connecting the UCIU in the root BBU and the UMPT in the leaf BBU. BBU3900 (GSM&WCDMA+LTE (GSM)) typical board configuration (GL SDR)
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
BBU3900 (GSM<E+WCDMA (GSM)) typical board configuration (GU SDR)
The multimode co-MPT application is supported since SRAN8.0. Added the GSM*WCDMA, GSM*LTE, WCDMA*LTE, GSM*WCDMA*LTE, and GSM&[WCDMA*LTE] configurations. The GSM*UMTS, GSM*LTE, UMTS*LTE configurations indicate that any two of the three modes share one main control board. The GSM*UMTS*LTE configuration indicates that the three modes share one main control board. The GSM&[UMTS*LTE] configuration indicates that the UMTS and LTE share one main control board while GSM uses a GO main control board. In SRAN8.0, it is recommended that one BBU3900 be configured to support co-MPT mode. If two BBUs are used to support co-MPT, they can be interconnected in UCIU+UMPT mode. Note: The asterisk (*) is used between different modes in a co-MPT base station. The modes contained in square brackets share the same main control board. From SRAN8.1 onwards, two BBUs that support co-MPT can be interconnected in UMPT +UMPT mode. SRAN9.0 and later versions support the BBU3910 (with a fully-interconnected backplane), which supports enhanced board interconnection technologies, for example, CoMP and CA. The BBU3910 applies to deployment and capacity expansion scenarios. Since SRAN9.0, co-MPT and hybrid-MPT in two BBUs are supported, such as [G*U*L]+ [G*U*L] and G&[U*L]+[U*L]. When both BBUs are configured with UMPTs, the UMPT +UMPT interconnection is recommended to substitute for the UCIU+UMPT interconnection that is supported since SRAN7.0. From SRAN9.0, the GUL co-BBP technique is supported, which means that multiple modes including GSM, UMTS, and LTE can be concurrently configured on one baseband processing Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
board. The co-BBP technique is supported only by co-MPT base stations, not by separate-MPT base stations. In separate-MPT base stations, different modes cannot be configured in the same baseband processing board. Like the BBU3900, the BBU3910 supports separate-MPT, co-MPT, and hybrid-MPT scenarios and it can be interconnected with the BBU3900. The following figures only show the typical configurations independently supported by the BBU3900 and BBU3910. Figure 4-1 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 working in GSM&UMTS mode FAN
GTMU WBBP
WMPT/UMPT
UEIU UPEU
Figure 4-2 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM<E mode FAN
GTMU LBBP
LMPT/UMPT
UEIU UPEU
Figure 4-3 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 working in UMTS<E mode UEIU
FAN LBBP
LMPT/UMPT
WBBP
WMPT/UMPT
UPEU
Figure 4-4 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM*UMTS mode FAN
UEIU
UBRIb WBBP
UMPT
UPEU
GSM*LTE and UMTS*LTE are similar. Each mode is configured with the corresponding baseband processing board. Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Figure 4-5 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM*UMTS*LTE mode FAN
UEIU
UBRIb LBBP WBBP
UPEU UMPT
Figure 4-6 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM&[WCDMA*LTE] mode FAN
GTMU LBBP WBBP
UEIU UPEU
UMPT
Figure 4-7 Typical board configuration of a BBU3910 in GSM&WCDMA mode FANd
UEIU
UBRIb UBBPd_U
UMPT_G
UBBPd_U
UMPT_U
UPEUd
Figure 4-8 Typical board configuration of a BBU3910 in GSM<E mode FANd
UEIU
UBRIb UBBPd_L
UMPT_G
UBBPd_L
UMPT_L
UPEUd
Figure 4-9 Typical board configuration of a BBU3910 in WCDMA<E mode FANd
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
UBBPd_U
UBBPd_U
UBBPd_U
UBBPd_U
UBBPd_L
UMPT_L
UBBPd_L
UMPT_U
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
UEIU
UPEUd
32
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Figure 4-10 Typical board configuration of a BBU3910 in GSM*UMTS mode FANd
UEIU UBBPd_U UBBPd_U
UPEUd UMPT_GU
Figure 4-11 Typical board configuration of a BBU3910 in GSM*LTE mode UEIU
FANd UBBPd_L UBBPd_L
UPEUd UMPT_GL
Figure 4-12 Typical board configuration of a BBU3910 in UMTS*LTE mode FANd
UBBPd_U
UBBPd_U
UBBPd_U
UBBPd_U
UBBPd_L UBBPd_L
UEIU
UPEUd UMPT_UL
Figure 4-13 Typical board configuration of a BBU3910 in GSM*UMTS*LTE mode FANd
UBBPd_U
UEIU
UBBPd_U UBBPd_L UBBPd_L
UPEUd UMPT_GUL
Typical board configuration of BBU3900+BBU3910 in GSM&WCDMA+LTE mode
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Typical board configuration of BBU3900+BBU3910 in GSM<E+WCDMA mode
Typical board configuration of BBU3900+BBU3910 in the GSM*UMTS*LTE co-MPT scenario with two BBUs
Typical board configuration of BBU3910+BBU3910 in the GSM*UMTS*LTE co-MPT with two BBUs Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
SRAN8.1 and later versions support following GULT quadruple-mode application scenarios: l
G*U*T
l
G*L*T
l
U*L*T
l
G*U*L*T (illustrated by a figure)
l
U&T
l
G&[L*T] (illustrated by a figure)
l
U&[L*T]
l
G&U+[L*T](G) (illustrated by a figure)
l
L*T
l
G&[U*T] (illustrated by a figure)
The following figures use the BBU3900s as examples. Note that the BBU3910 does not support old boards. Figure 4-14 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM*UMTS*FDD*TDD mode FAN
UBBPd_U
UBBPd_T
UPEU
UBBPd_L UBBPd_L UBBPd_U
UPEU UMPT_GULT
Figure 4-15 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM&[FDD*TDD] mode FAN
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
UBBPd_T
UBBPd_T
UBBPd_T
GTMU
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
UPEU
35
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
UBBPd_L UBBPd_L
UPEU UMPT_LT
Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM&UMTS+FDD*TDD mode
Figure 4-16 Typical board configuration of a BBU3900 in GSM&[UMTS*TDD] mode FAN
UBBPd_T
UBBPd_T
UBBPd_U
GTMU
UBBPd_U UBBPd_U
UPEU
UPEU UMPT_UT
In separate-MPT scenarios, the dual-star CPRI connection is recommended for multimode RRUs, that is, the baseband processing board of each mode provides CPRI ports for connecting RRUs. In co-MPT scenarios, the CPRI MUX topology is recommended for multimode RRUs, that is, multiple modes share one CPRI cable. If the GSM mode is deployed on a main control board where co-MPT is applied, a UBRIb must be configured. In UL co-MPT scenario, the WBBPf, LBBPd, or UBBPd can provide CPRI ports. The following table lists the CPRI MUX-related specifications of different boards. The number of boards to be configured is determined by these boards' cell access capabilities. UBBPd boards introduced in SRAN9.0 have higher CPRI port capabilities and access capabilities than WBBPf/ LBBPd boards. CPR I Line Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
GU CPRI MUX on the UBRIb
GL CPRI MUX on the UBRIb
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
UL CPRI MUX on the WBBPf/LBBPd
36
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Rate (G)
Cell Access Capabilit y of a CPRI Port
Cell Access Capability of the Board
Cell Access Capabilit y of a CPRI Port
Cell Access Capability of the Board
Cell Access Capability of a CPRI Port
Cell Access Capability of the Board
2.5
G: 16 TRXs+U: 4C
G: 96 TRXs +U: 24 C
G: 16 TRXs+L: 10 MHz
G: 96 TRXs +L: 6x10 MHz
U: 4 C+L: 10 MHz
U: 24 TRXs +L: 6x10 MHz
4.9
G: 32 TRXs+U: 8C
G: 126 TRXs+U: 24 C
G: 32 TRXs+L: 20 MHz
G: 126 TRXs+L: 4x20 MHz
U: 8 C+L: 20 MHz
U: 24 TRXs +L: 4x20 MHz
Note: In the preceding table, the number of carriers and supported LTE bandwidth are indicated before and after the symbol x. For example, L: 6x10 MHz indicates the number of carriers is six and the supported LTE bandwidth is 10 MHz. The total cell access capabilities of a board are the sum of the cell access capability of each CPRI port on the board. When the cell access capability of a port is maximized, the total cell access capabilities of the board are restricted. For CPRI MUX on GU or GL dual-mode base stations, a maximum of two UBRIb boards can be added as required. For CPRI MUX on UL dual-mode base stations, only one baseband processing board is allowed to provide a CPRI port to deploy CPRI MUX.
4.2.3 BBU Board Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring various types of boards in the BBU.
4.2.3.1 GSM BBU Board Configurations The following table lists the GSM BBU board configurations. NOTE
For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections: l For carrier specifications, see Capacity Specifications. l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications. l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-13 GSM BBU board configurations External Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
GM5D00 GTMU01
GSM Main Control and Transport Unit (4E1&1 electrical FE&1 optical FE)
GSM Transmission & Timing & Management Unit type b (GTMUb)
1
A GTMUb must be configured in the following base stations: l GBTS l Separate-MPT multimode base station including a GBTS
l Provides four E1s. l Provides one FE electrical port. l Provides six CPRI ports.
GM5D0G TMUC00
GSM Main Control and Transport Unit (4 E1 & 1 electrical FE/ GE & 1 optical FE/GE)
GTMUc: GSM transmission & timing & management unit type c
1
l Provides four E1s.
In SRAN11.0, the GTMUc is introduced, which incorporates all functions of the GTMUb, except that the GTMUc supports neither the UTRPc nor the GU CPRI panel convergence function and does not support SingleOM or GTMUc conversion. The GTMUc is also incorported into SRAN9.0 and SRAN10.1, with the same restrictions as SRAN11.0.
l Provides one FE electrical port. l Provides one FE optical port. l Provides six CPRI ports. GM5D00 UBRI00
Universal BaseBand Radio Interface Board (6 CPRI interface)
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
UBRI: Universal baseband radio interface unit for GSM Provides six CPRI ports.
1
The UBRI needs to be configured in the following scenarios: l More than six CPRI ports are required by GSM. l RFUs and RRUs are configured, which include RRUs or RFUs in GSM mode. l A UBRIb needs to be configured to provide CPRI ports if the GSM mode is deployed on the UMPT where co-MPT is applied.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
4.2.3.2 UMTS BBU Board Configurations NOTE
For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections: l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications. l For signaling specifications, see Signaling Specifications. For baseband specifications, see Baseband Specifications. l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.
The following table lists the UMTS BBU board configurations. Table 4-14 Configurations of the UMTS main control board External Model
Description
Function
Maximum Number to Be Configure d in a Single BBU
Configuration Principle
QWMD00 WMPT00
WCDMA Main Control and Transport Unit (4E1&1 Electrical FE&1 Optical FE)
WMPT: WCDMA main control and transport unit
1
One WMPT or UMPTa1 must be configured in a base station of which the supported modes include UMTS, but the UMPTa1 and WMPT cannot be configured in the same BBU.
l Provides four E1s/ T1s. l Provides one FE electrical port. l Provides one FE optical port.
The main control board can be configured in 1 +1 backup mode for UMTS only not for GU or UL. When 1+1 backup is used, two main control boards in the same mode are configured in one BBU. Since SRAN7.0 or RAN14.0, the UMPTa1 is recommended. The UMPTa1 is required when a newly deployed site meets any of the following conditions: 1. Support IPSec and PKI features 2. The signaling processing capability exceeds 170 CNBAP/s. 3. UMTS is served by the leaf BBU, and BBU interconnection is implemented by connecting the UCIU and UMPT. 4. There is a need for UMTS-to-LTE evolution. 5. This board can also be configured when cotransmission is applied and the GSM IPSec or GSM PKI function is enabled. In SRAN8.0, the UMPTa1 allows any two or all triple modes of GSM, UMTS, and LTE to share one main control board.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
Maximum Number to Be Configure d in a Single BBU
WD2D0U MPT100
Universal Main Processing and Transmission Board(4E1&1 Electrical FE/ GE&1 Optical FE/GE, UMPTa1)
UMPTa1: Universal main processing and transmission board
1
Configuration Principle
l Provides four E1s/ T1s. l Provides one FE/GE optical port. l Provides one FE/GE electrical port. l Provides one CI port.
QWMDWB BPD100
QWMDWB BPD300
QWMDWB BPD200
QWMDWB BPF101
Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell, CE:UL192/ DL192) Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell, CE:UL256/ DL256) Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell, CE:UL384/ DL384) Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell, CE:UL192/ DL256)
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
WCDMA baseband processing board l A WBBPdx provides six CPRI ports. l A WBBPfx provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port.
6
The number of WBBPs to be configured in a base station depends on the number of cells, number of uplink and downlink CEs, signaling processing capability, and number of CPRI ports to be supported by the base station. When the DC-HSDPA+MIMO feature is used: l If the WBBPd, WBBPf1, WBBPf2, or WBBPf3 is used, each sector must be configured with one WBBP. l If the WBBPf4 is used, every three sectors are configured with one WBBP. When the feature Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell is used: l If the WBBPd2 or WBBPd3 is used, a cell can be shared by a maximum of six RRUs (2RX). l If the WBBPd1 is used, a cell can be shared by a maximum of three RRUs (2RX). The WBBPd and WBBPf can be configured in the same base station.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
External Model
Description
QWMDWB BPF201
Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell, CE:UL256/ DL384)
The WBBPd is recommended in versions earlier than RAN14.0. At a newly deployed site of SRAN5.0, RAN12.0, or later, the WBBPb cannot be used.
Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell, CE:UL384/ DL512)
To support DC-HSDPA+MIMO, each sector must be configured with one WBBPb, WBBPd, WBBPf1, WBBPf2, or WBBPf3.
QWMDWB BPF301
QWMDWB BPF400
Function
4 Product Configuration
Maximum Number to Be Configure d in a Single BBU
Configuration Principle
In RAN14.0, the WBBPf is recommended.
The WBBPf4 supports DC-HSDPA+MIMO in 3-sector configuration. When independent demodulation of signals from multiple RRUs in one cell is enabled, the WBBPd2, WBBPd3, or WBBPf supports a maximum of six RRUs in one cell, each RRU with two receive channels. The WBBPd1 or WBBPb supports a maximum of three RRUs in one cell, each RRU with two receive channels.
Baseband Processing Unit (6Cell, CE:UL512/ DL768)
4.2.3.3 LTE BBU Board Configurations This section describes the configuration principles for LTE BBU boards. The following table lists the LTE BBU board configurations. NOTE
For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections: l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications. l For signaling specifications, see Signaling Specifications. For baseband specifications, see Baseband Specifications. l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-15 LTE BBU board configurations External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Max imu m Qua ntity
Configuration Principle
WD2D00L MPT00
LTE Main Processing & Transmissio n Unit (With GPS Card)
LMPT: LTE main processing and transmission unit
1
One LMPT or UMPTa2 must be configured in a base station of which the supported modes include LTE, but the UMPTa2 and LMPT cannot be configured in the same BBU.
l Provides two FE/GE electrical ports. l Provides two FE/GE optical ports.
The main control board can be configured in 1+1 backup mode for LTE only not for GL or UL.
l Contains a GPS satellite card. Universal Main Processing & Transmissio n Unit (4E1&1 Electrical FE/GE&1 Optical FE/ GE, UMPTa2)
Universal main processing and transmission unit type a2 (UMPTa2)
WD2D0L BBPC00
LTE Baseband Processing Unit C
LTE baseband processing unit (LBBPc): provides six CPRI ports.
WD2DLB BPD100
LTE Baseband Processing Unit D1
LTE baseband processing unit (LBBPd1): Provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port.
WD2DLB BPD101
LTE Baseband Processing Unit D1
LTE baseband processing unit (LBBPd1): Provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port.
LTE Baseband Processing Unit D2
LTE baseband processing unit (LBBPd2): Provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port.
WD2D00 UMPT01
WD2D0L BBPD02
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
1
In LTE or SRAN scenarios, two UMPT boards can share a signaling resource pool. In SRAN8.0, the UMPTa2 allows any two or all triple modes of GSM, UMTS, and LTE to share one main control board.
l Provides one FE/GE electrical port. l Provides one FE/GE optical port. l Provides four E1s/T1s.
6
The number of LBBPs to be configured in a base station that supports LTE depends on the number of cells, bandwidth, antenna configuration, and number of CPRI ports to be supported by the base station. A BBU in LTE mode is configured with at least one LBBP, and each LBBP is configured with a maximum of six RF modules. The LBBPc and LBBPd can be configured in the same base station. When the LBBPc is configured: l In SISO, DL 2x2 MIMO, and UL 2x2 MU-MIMO modes, one LBBPc supports three cells, each with a scalable bandwidth of 1.4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
WD2D0L BBPD03
LTE Baseband Processing Unit D3
LTE baseband processing unit (LBBPd3): Provides six CPRI ports and one HEI port.
4 Product Configuration
Max imu m Qua ntity
Configuration Principle
l When DL 4x2 MIMO or UL 4-antenna receive diversity is used, one LBBPc supports three cells, each with a scalable bandwidth of 1.4/3/5/10 MHz, or one cell with a scalable bandwidth of 15/20 MHz. l When DL 2x2 MIMO and UL 2x2 MU-MIMO is used, the three cells supported by a single LBBPc can be configured with different bandwidth, for example, 3 x (5 MHz/10 MHz+10 MHz) or (15 MHz+5 MHz+5 MHz). When the LBBPd is configured: l When 2x2 MIMO is used, each LBBPd1 supports a maximum of three cells with a scalable bandwidth of 1.4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz. l When 2x2 MIMO, 4x2 MIMO, or 4way receive diversity is used, each LBBPd2 supports a maximum of three cells with a scalable bandwidth of 1.4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz. l The LBBPd2 supports the mixed configuration of 2T2R and 2T4R/ 4T4R with a maximum of three carriers. l When 2x2 MIMO is used, each LBBPd3 supports a maximum of six cells with a scalable bandwidth of 1.4/3/5/10/15/20 MHz, and the six cells can use different bandwidth. WD2DLBBPD100 will no longer be sold but will gradually be replaced by WD2DLBBPD101.
4.2.3.4 Common BBU Board Configurations This section describes the principles for configuring common boards in a BBU. The following table lists the configuration principles for the power boards, main control boards, and baseband processing boards in the BBU. Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
NOTE
For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections: l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications. l For signaling specifications, see Signaling Specifications. For baseband specifications, see Baseband Specifications. l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.
Table 4-16 Configurations of the power boards, main control boards, and baseband processing boards Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2M00 0PEU03
HERT BBU WD2MUPE UC,-48V Power and Environment interface Unit
HERT BBU WD2MUPEUC,-4 8V Power and Environment interface Unit
2
Network deployment scenario: A BBU numbered 02319940 contains one UPEUc by default, which supports power supply of 360 W. If power backup or high power (greater than 360 W and less than or equal to 650 W) is required, a second UPEUc needs to be configured.
360 W power module of the BBU
Capacity expansion scenarios: If one or two UPEUa boards have been configured before the capacity expansion, the boards must be replaced with two UPEUc boards. If one UPEUc board has been configured before the capacity expansion, one UPEUc board must be added. The UPEUa and UPEUc boards cannot be configured together. The UPEUa and UPEUc use different designs. When one UPEUa and one UPEUc are used together, the power supply capacity ranges from 330 W to 360 W. If the BBU's total power consumption reaches 360 W and the UPEUc malfunctions, all power consumption is carried by the UPEUa, which can only supply 330 W power, resulting in shutdown of the entire BBU.
WD2M00 PEIUD2
Function Module,HE RT BBU,WD2 MUPEUD2, Power and Environment interface Unit(-48V)
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Function Module,HERT BBU,WD2MUPE UD2,Power and Environment interface Unit (-48V) 650 W power module in the BBU
2
Network deployment scenario: A BBU numbered 02310JJE contains one UPEUd by default, which supports power supply of 650 W. If power backup (less than or equal to 650 W) is required, a second UPEUd needs to be configured. Capacity expansion scenario: Circuit breakers in existing cabinets need to be changed, so the power capacity of circuit breakers needs to be considered (must be greater than or equal to 20 A).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2DU MPTB10 0
Universal Main Processing and Transmissio n Board (4E1&1 Electrical FE/GE&1 Optical FE/ GE, UMPTb1)
Universal main processing and transmission board (UMPTb1)
In coMPT/ hybridMPT single BBU scenarios: 1
The UMPTb1 is recommended for GSM mode.
In coMPT/ hybridMPT dual BBU scenarios: 2
l If the signaling capacity exceeds 170 CNBAP/ s, the UMPTb1 must be configured.
l Provides four E1s/T1s. l Provides one FE/GE optical port. l Provides one FE/GE electrical port. l Provides one CI port.
SeparateMPT scenarios: l Single BBU: 2 l BBU interco nnecti on: 2
The configuration principles for the UMPTb1 in UMTS only mode are as follows: l From RAN14.0 onwards, this board can be configured to support the UMTS mode. l The base station needs to support the IPsec and PKI features.
l If UMTS-to-LTE evolution is required in future, the UMPTb1 must be configured. l The UMPTb1 board working in UMTS mode cannot be configured in the BBU where a WMPT board has been configured. The configuration principle for the UMPTb1 in LTE only mode is as follows: A UMPTb1 in LTE only mode cannot be configured in the same BBU as an LMPT. The configuration principles for the UMPTb1 in multiple modes are as follows: l From SRAN8.0 onwards, the UMPTb1 board is recommended for single-mode and multimode base stations. l A UMPTb1 board is mandatory in a co-MPT multimode base station. l The base station uses GU or GL cotransmission and needs to support the IPsec and PKI features for GSM. l When two BBUs in a separate-MPT multimode base station are interconnected in UCIU+UMPT mode, a UMPTb1 must be configured in BBU 1 (secondary BBU).
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2D0U MPTB01
Universal Main Processing & Transmissio n unit with 4E1 and 2FE/ GE interface UMPTb2
Universal main processing and transmission board (UMPTb2)
In coMPT/ hybridMPT single BBU scenarios: 1
l The UMPTb2 supports GPS synchronization. For a newly deployed SRAN or LTE FDD site that requires GPS clock, a UMPTb2 is preferentially configured.
l Provides one FE/GE electrical port. l Provides one FE/GE optical port. l Provides four E1s/T1s. l Provides one CI port (for BBU interconnectio n). l Provides the GPS clock port.
l For a newly deployed GSM only (eGBTS) or UMTS only site that requires GPS lock, a USCU is preferentially configured or a UMPTb2 can be configured as the substitute.
In coMPT/ hybridMPT dual BBU scenarios: 2 SeparateMPT scenarios: l Single BBU: 2 l BBU interco nnecti on: 2
GM5D0U BRIB00
Universal BaseBand Radio Interface Board (6 CPRI interface,UB RIb)
Universal baseband radio interface unit (UBRIb) Provides six CPRI ports.
In separateMPT scenarios: 1 In coMPT scenarios: 2
A UBRIb needs to be configured in the following scenarios: l More than six CPRI ports are required by GSM. l RFUs and RRUs are configured, which include RRUs or RFUs in the GSM mode. l This board is required and must provide CPRI ports if the GSM mode is deployed on the UMPT where co-MPT is applied. l This board is required and must provide CPRI ports if the GSM mode is deployed on the UMPT.
WD2DU BBPD100
Universal Baseband Processing Unit d1
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
UBBPd1, which provides six CPRI ports
GSM: If the main control board is a GTMUb, a
From SRAN9.0, the UBBPd is recommended for UMTS only and LTE only modes. The UBBPd supports a single mode or multiple modes. The UBBPd can be configured with the WBBP or LBBP together.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2DU BBPD200
Universal Baseband Processing Unit d2
UBBPd2, which provides six CPRI ports
During capacity expansion, it is recommended that the existing baseband processing boards be fully configured and the UBBPd be configured if the required capacity is not reached.
WD2DU BBPD300
Universal Baseband Processing Unit d3
UBBPd3, which provides six CPRI ports
Universal Baseband Processing Unit d4
UBBPd4, which provides six CPRI ports
Universal Baseband Processing Unit d5
UBBPd5, which provides six CPRI ports
maximum of five baseband processing boards can be configure d. If the main control board is a UMPT, a maximum of six baseband processing boards can be configure d.
WD2DU BBPD400
WD2DU BBPD500
In GBSS16.0, the UBBP must be configured when any of the following conditions is met in GSM only scenarios: l The VAMOS FR, VAMOS II, 4-Antenna Receive Diversity, Antenna Frequency Hopping, and MICC features need to be supported. l The AAU3902 can work in GSM mode. UMTS only mode: l From RAN16.0, the UBBP is recommended for UMTS only mode. LTE only mode: l In eRAN7.0, the following UBBP boards support LTE only mode: UBBPd3, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6.
In UMTS l The sector configuration principles for the or LTE UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6 in LTE only mode, a mode are as follows: maximum – A UBBPd4 cannot be configured with of six 2T2R, 2T4R, and 4T4R sectors together. UBBPd1 boards can – A UBBPd5 supports a maximum of six be 2T2R cells. configure – In versions earlier than eRAN7.0 SPC210, d. a UBBPd5 cannot be configured with 2R and 4R cells together. In eRAN7.0 SPC210 and later versions, a UBBPd5 can be configured with a maximum of three cells that are combined by 2R and 4R cells. – In versions earlier than eRAN7.0 SPC210, a UBBPd6 cannot be configured with 2R and 4R cells together. In eRAN7.0 SPC210 and later version, a UBBPd6 can be configured with a maximum of three 2T2R cells and three 2T4R/4T4R cells together. – When a UBBPd6 is configured with 2T2R sectors, it supports a maximum of six cells. – When a UBBPd6 is configured with 2T4R or 4T4R sectors, it supports a maximum of six cells.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
Model
Descriptio n
Function
WD2DU BBPD600
Universal Baseband Processing Unit d6
UBBPd6, which provides six CPRI ports
4 Product Configuration
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
l In eRAN8.0, a UBBPd cannot be configured 2R and 4R cells together. In co-BBP multimode scenarios: l To support GU mode, the UBBPd1, UBBPd2, UBBPd3, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, or UBBPd6 must be configured. l To support GL mode, the UBBPd3, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, or UBBPd6 must be configured. l To support UL mode, the UBBPd6 must be configured. l To support GUL mode, the UBBPd6 must be configured.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
4.2.3.5 Clock and Transmission Board Configurations This section describes the principles for configuring clock and transmission boards in a BBU. In SRAN6.0, three modes can be deployed on two BBUs. For example, GSM and UMTS are deployed on one BBU and LTE mode is deployed on the other BBU, or GSM and LTE are deployed on one BBU and UMTS mode is deployed on the other BBU. The two BBUs cannot share transmission resources or clock signals. Configurations of LTE mode in GU+L mode are the same as those of LTE only mode. In GL+U mode, UMTS configurations are the same as the configurations in UMTS only mode. In SRAN7.0, two BBUs can be interconnected to support three modes, such as G&U+L(G) and G&L+U(G). In addition, co-clock and co-transmission are supported in BBU interconnection scenarios. In SRAN7.0, the UMPT is introduced to support the mainstream solution of cotransmission. The UTRPc is used for the alternative solution of co-transmission. In RAN14.0, the UTRPa board is introduced (used only for UMTS) to replace the UTRP3 and UTRP4 boards, which will enter the EOM phase. In SRAN8.0, co-MPT is introduced. In co-MPT scenarios, co-transmission is recommended. The following table lists the principles for configuring clock and transmission boards in a BBU. NOTE
For details about the specifications of each board, see the following contents in 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description: Product Specifications > Technical Specifications of the BBU3900. For details about the transmission specifications, see Transmission Specifications.
Table 4-17 Principles for configuring clock and transmission boards in a BBU Externa l Model
Descripti on
Function
Maxi mum Quan tity
Configuration Principle
WD2D0 0USCU 00
Universal Satellite Clock Unit
USCUb11, clock board used for LTE, without a satellite card
1
This board needs to be configured for the LTE mode when any of the following conditions is met: l This board is required when a BITS reference clock source is used for the LTE mode. l This board is required when the LTE mode is not configured with a main control board that has a built-in GPS satellite card but requires the GPS or OTDOA function. l This board is required when the 1PPS/1PPS+TOD or RGPS clock is used for the LTE mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Externa l Model
Descripti on
Function
Maxi mum Quan tity
Configuration Principle
WD2D0 USCU3 00
Universal Synchroni zation Clock Unit Supportin g GPS and BITS
USCUb14, clock board with a built-in u-blox GPS satellite card
1
This board is optional and can be configured from SRAN7.0, GBSS14.0, or RAN14.0 onwards. l This board is required when GPS or BITS clock synchronization is used for the GSM or UMTS mode. l This board is required when a BITS reference clock source is used for the LTE mode. l This board is required when the LTE mode is not configured with a main control board that has a built-in GPS satellite card but requires the GPS or OTDOA function. l This board is required when the UMTS mode requires the OTDOA function. l In GU/GL/UL dual-mode base station, this board is required when GPS or BITS clock synchronization is used for GSM or UMTS, or when BITS clock synchronization is used for LTE. l This board is required in a GU/GL/UL dual-mode base station where the Common Clock feature is activated and GPS or BITS clock synchronization is used. l This board is required in either a single- or multi-mode base station when the 1PPS/1PPS+TOD or RGPS clock is used for the LTE mode.
WD2D0 0UCIU0 0
GM5D UTRPB 400
Universal Cascading Interface Unit
GSM TDM over E1/T1 Interface Unit
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
UCIU for BBU interconnection. It provides one port for connecting to the root BBU and five ports for connecting to the leaf BBUs.
1
Transmission extension board for GSM (UTRPb4)
1
For a separate-MPT triple-mode base station, BBU 0 needs to be configured with the UCIU if the two BBUs are interconnected by connecting the UCIU in one BBU and the UMPT in the other BBU. In GU dual mode, the UCIU board is required when a cabinet used by a 3900 series base station and a cabinet used by a 3012 series base station are installed side by side. In this case, the GTMUb board is mandatory and the UCIU board cannot be used for BBU interconnection. This board is required when four to eight E1s/T1s need to be provided for GSM.
Provides eight E1s/T1s over TDM
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Externa l Model
Descripti on
Function
Maxi mum Quan tity
Configuration Principle
QWMD 0UTRP 300
Iub ATM Interface Unit (8 E1s)
Transmission extension board for UMTS (UTRP3)
4
This board is required when the E1/T1 ports on the main control and transmission board in UMTS mode support ATM transmission and more than four E1s/T1s over ATM ports are required.
4
This board is required when the E1 ports on the main control and transmission board in UMTS mode support IP transmission and more than four E1s over IP are required.
4
This board is required when two or more FE electrical ports or any GE electrical port is used by UMTS.
Provides eight E1s over ATM. QWMP 0UTRP 400
Iub IP Interface Unit (8 E1s)
Transmission extension board for UMTS (UTRP4) Provides eight E1s over IP.
QWMP 0UTRP 900
QWMP 0UTRP 200
QWMD 0UTRP 600
Iub IP Interface Unit (4 FE/GE Electrical ports)
Transmission extension board for UMTS (UTRP9)
Iub IP Interface Unit (2 FE/GE Optical ports)
Transmission extension board for UMTS (UTRP2)
Iub ATM Interface Unit (1 Unchanne lized STM-1)
Transmission extension board for UMTS (UTRP6)
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Each board provides four FE/GE electrical ports, and the number of the boards to be configured is determined by the required number of FE/GE electrical ports.
Provides four FE/GE electrical ports. 4
This board is required when two or more FE optical ports or any GE optical port is used by UMTS. In SRAN7.0 or RAN14.0, the UTRPc is configured by default.
Provides two FE/GE optical ports. 4
This board is required when unchannelized STM-1 transmission is used by UMTS.
Provides one unchannelized STM-1 port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Externa l Model
Descripti on
Function
Maxi mum Quan tity
Configuration Principle
QWMD 0UTRP A00
Universal Transmiss ion Resource Processin g Unit (8E1/T1)
Transmission extension board for UMTS (UTRPa) Provides eight ATM over E1 or IP over E1.
4
l This board is required when the E1/T1 ports on the main processing and transmission board in UMTS mode support ATM or IP transmission and more than four E1/ T1 ports are required. l Each board provides eight E1/T1 ports, and the number of the boards to be configured is determined by the required number of E1/T1 ports. l The ATM transmission and IP transmission cannot be used together. l The delivered UTRPa board supports the plug-and-play function in RAN14.0 and RAN14.1, and the delivered board cannot be customized. From RAN15.0 onwards, this board is supported by using software.
QWMD 0UTRP C00
Universal Transmiss ion Resource Processin g Unit (4 Electrical FE/GE ports & 2 Optical FE/GE ports)
Transmission extension board for UMTS (UTRPc)
1
l Works in GSM, UMTS, or LTE mode.
l This board is required when a base station that uses triplemode co-transmission is not configured with a UMPT, or is configured with a UMPT but requires expansion of the transmission capability.
l Provides four FE/GE electrical ports.
l This board is required when IPSec needs to be supported for GSM. l This board is required when IPSec is used for UMTS and no UMPT is configured for UMTS.
l Provides two FE/GE optical ports.
l This board is required when GE ports are required by GSM.
QCUBB BULIG 01
Lighting Arrester Box
SLPU: surge protection box for transmission
1
WD2P0 0UELP0 0
Universal E1/T1 Lighting Protection Unit
UELP: universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit
-
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Optional. This board is introduced in SRAN7.0, GBSS14.0, RAN14.0, and eRAN3.0. The GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes can share one UTRPc board. From SRAN7.0 onwards, the UTRPc board is recommended for increasing FE/GE ports in all modes. When the GTMUa board is used, the UTRPc board cannot be used for transmission capacity expansion.
l Each surge protection box is configured with a maximum of four surge protection boards. l A BTS3900AL cabinet contains one surge protection box. One piece needs to be configured when more than four surge protection boards are required. l Every four E1 ports are configured with one package for surge protection. l A BTS3900AL AC cabinet contains two E1 surge protection packages. This board needs to be configured when more than two E1 surge protection packages are required.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Externa l Model
Descripti on
Function
Maxi mum Quan tity
Configuration Principle
WD2P0 UFLPB 00
Universial FE/GE Lighting Protection Unit
UFLPb: universal FE/GE lightning protection unit
-
l Every two FE/GE electrical ports are configured with one package for surge protection.
WD2P0 UFLPC 00
Universial FE/GE Lighting Protection Unit
UFLPc: universal FE/GE lightning protection unit
-
l A BTS3900AL AC cabinet contains one FE/GE surge protection package. This board needs to be configured when more than one FE/GE surge protection package is required. l Every two FE/GE electrical ports are configured with one package for surge protection. l A BTS3900AL AC cabinet contains one FE/GE surge protection package. This board needs to be configured when more than one FE/GE surge protection package is required.
4.2.4 CPRI Networking Configuration The following table lists the CPRI networking configuration principles. NOTE
The CPRI networking configuration principles apply to the BBU3900.
Table 4-18 CPRI networking configuration principles Application Scenarios
Networking Topology
Configuration Principle
Multimode RF modules in separateMPT mode
Dual-star
The dual-star topology is recommended.
CPRI MUX
l The WBBPf/UBBPd_U and GTMUb must be configured in GU CPRI MUX mode. The WBBPf/UBBPd_U must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both GSM and UMTS signals. The WBBPf or UBBPd_U must be configured in slot 2 or 3. l The LBBPd/UBBPd_L and GTMUb must be configured in GL CPRI MUX mode. The LBBPd/UBBPd_L must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both GSM and LTE signals. The LBBPd or UBBPd_L must be configured in slot 2 or 3. l The LBBPd/UBBPd_L and WBBPf/UBBPd_U must be configured in UL CPRI MUX mode. The LBBPd/UBBPd_L or WBBPf/UBBPd_U must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both UMTS and LTE signals. Baseband boards that connect to fiber optic cables must be configured in slot 2 or 3.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
Application Scenarios
Networking Topology
Configuration Principle
Multimode RF modules in co-MPT mode
CPRI MUX
The CPRI MUX topology is recommended.
4 Product Configuration
l The WBBPf/UBBPd_U and UBRIb must be configured in GU CPRI MUX mode. The UBRIb must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both GSM and UMTS signals. The WBBPf or UBBPd_U must be configured in slot 2 or 3. The UBRIb must be configured in slot 0 or 1. l The LBBPd/UBBPd_L and UBRIb must be configured in GL CPRI MUX mode. The UBRIb must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both GSM and LTE signals. The LBBPd or UBBPd_L must be configured in slot 2 or 3. The UBRIb must be configured in slot 1. l The WBBPf/UBBPd_U and LBBPd/UBBPd_L must be configured in UL CPRI MUX mode. The WBBPf/UBBPd_U or LBBPd/UBBPd_L must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that process both UMTS and LTE signals. Baseband boards that connect to fiber optic cables must be configured in slot 2 or 3. Load sharing (in transition scenarios)
l In the GU SDR load-sharing networking topology, the WBBPa/WBBPb/ WBBPd/WBBPf/UBBPd UMTS and UBRI/UBRIb are configured. Both the GSM interface board and UMTS baseband board are connected to CPRI fiber optic cables. l In the GL SDR load-sharing networking topology, the LBBPc/LBBPd/ UBBPd LTE and UBRI/UBRIb are configured. Both the GSM interface board and LTE baseband board are connected to CPRI fiber optic cables. l In the UL SDR load-sharing networking topology, the WBBPa/WBBPb/ WBBPd/WBBPf/UBBPd UMTS and LBBPc/LBBPd/UBBPd LTE are configured. Both the UMTS and LTE baseband boards are connected to CPRI fiber optic cables.
4.3 RF Module Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules in a 3900 series base station.
4.3.1 RF Module Configuration The type of RF modules to be used is determined by the frequency band. Each sector is configured with at least one RF module. The number of RF modules to be configured depends on the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. The following table lists the relationships between sectors and RF modules.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-19 RF module configuration Configuration Scenario
RF Module Configuration
Transmit diversity
Two TX channels are required for one sector:
2x2 MIMO
l Two 1T modulesa are configured for one sector.
MIMO Prime
l One 2Tb or 4T module is configured for one sector.
DL 4x2 MIMO
Four TX channels are required for one sector:
DL 4x4 MIMO
l Two 2T modules are configured for one sector. l One 4T module is configured for one sector. NOTE 1T modules cannot be used in this configuration scenario.
UL 4-way Diversity
Four RX channels are required for one sector:
UL 2x4 multi-user MIMO (MU-MIMO)
l Two 2R modules are configured for one sector. l One 4R module is configured for one sector.
a: In versions earlier than SRAN6.0, when two 1T RF modules are configured to support MIMO, the two RF modules must be cascaded by connecting CPRI ports. From SRAN6.0 onwards, it is recommended that the two RF modules be cascaded by connecting CPRI ports. b: In UMTS mode, two 2T RF modules in one sector support UL 4-way diversity but do not support carrier or power expansion. If RFUs and RRUs are used in the same base station, they cannot operate in the same frequency band.
The application scenarios supported by RF modules vary according to the working mode of the RF modules, as shown in the following table. Table 4-20 RF module configuration restrictions Mode
Restriction
GSM
l The DRFUs support UL 4-way diversity. l From GBSS16.0/SRAN9.0, the UBBPd is introduced to process GSM baseband signals and support UL 4-way diversity. l The DRFU RRU3004, and 2T RF modules support the transmit diversity. l When 4-way receive diversity is used, two DRFUs must be configured. l Each DRFU or RRU3004 supports only one TRX when PBT or transmit diversity is used. Each cell served by the DRFU or RRU3004 supports a maximum of two TRXs. When transmit diversity is used, the maximum number of carriers supported by each GSM RF module with two transmit channels decreases by half. l The DRFU and RRU3004 do not support PBT when transmit diversity is used. l When UL 4-way diversity is used, the DRFU does not support TMA. When 4-way diversity is used, each cell supports a maximum of two TRXs. NOTE DRFUs and RRU3004 modules do not support eGBTS.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Mode
Restriction
UMTS
l RFUs support transmit diversity, 2x2 MIMO, and UL 4-way diversity. l RRUs support DL transmit diversity, 2x2 MIMO, and UL 4-way diversity.
LTE
The following configuration scenarios are supported: 2x2 MIMO, UL 4-way diversity, DL 4x2 MIMO, UL 2x4 MU-MIMO, and DL 4x4 MIMO. When DL 4x2 MIMO or DL 4x4 MIMO is used, two cascaded 2T RF modules or one 4T RF module is required. 1T RF modules do not support DL 4x2 MIMO or DL 4x4 MIMO.
NOTE When the SingleOM solution is used, GSM RF signals do not support transmit diversity.
4.3.2 RF Modules Working at Band 8 (900 MHz) This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 8 (900 MHz frequency band).
RFUs Working at Band 8 (900 MHz Frequency Band) The following table lists RFU configurations. Table 4-21 RFU configurations Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l WD5M9EMRFU05 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
MRFUe for MultiMode 900MHz EGSM
MRFUe working at the 900 MHz EGSM frequency band:
l At a BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l WD5P9EMRFU04 (applying to the BTS3900AL)
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x125 W. l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz
l At a BTS3900 AL site: 18
l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE (supported only in multimode base stations), GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l WD5M9EMRFU03 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
MRFUd for MultiMode 900MHz EGSM
This module is no longer sold after GA of the enhanced MRFUd. MRFUd working at the 900 MHz EGSM frequency band:
l At a BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l WD5P9EMRFU03 (applying to the BTS3900AL)
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W.
l At a BTS3900 AL site: 18
l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode. l WD5M9PMRFU03 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) l WD5P9PMRFU02 (applying to the BTS3900AL)
MRFUd for MultiMode 900MHz PGSM
This module is no longer sold after GA of the enhanced MRFUd. MRFUd working at the 900 MHz PGSM frequency band: l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W.
l At a BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L site: 12 l At a BTS3900 AL site: 18
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l WD5M9EMRFU07 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
RF Unit V2 for MultiMode 900MHz EGSM
MRFU V2 working at the 900 MHz EGSM frequency band:
l At a BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l WD5P9EMRFU05 (applying to the BTS3900AL)
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz
l At a BTS3900 AL site: 18
l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, or GL SDR mode. l WD5M9PMRFU01 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) l WD5P9PMRFU01 (applying to the BTS3900AL)
RF Unit V2 for MultiMode 900MHz PGSM
This module will no longer be sold. MRFU V2 working at the 900 MHz PGSM frequency band: l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. l UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz
l At a BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L site: 12 l At a BTS3900 AL site: 18
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l WD5M9PMRFU02 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
RF Unit V2 for MultiMode 900MHz PGSM
MRFU V2 working at the 900 MHz PGSM frequency band:
l At a BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l WD5P9PMRFU02 (applying to the BTS3900AL)
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. l UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz
l At a BTS3900 AL site: 18
l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode. l WD5M9EMRFU02 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) l WD5P9EMRFU02 (applying to the BTS3900AL)
RF Unit V2 for MultiMode 900MHz EGSM
MRFU V2 working at the 900 MHz EGSM frequency band: l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz
l At a BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L site: 12 l At a BTS3900 AL site: 18
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l WD5M9EMRFU06 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
MRFUd for MultiMode 900MHz EGSM
Enhanced MRFUd working at the 900 MHz EGSM frequency band:
l At a BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l WD5M9EMRFU13 (applying to the BTS3900AL)
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz
l At a BTS3900 AL site: 18
l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode. l WD5M9PMRFU06 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) l WD5M9PMRFU13 (applying to the BTS3900AL)
MRFUd for MultiMode 900MHz PGSM
Enhanced MRFUd working at the 900 MHz PGSM frequency band: l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. l UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz
l At a BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L site: 12 l At a BTS3900 AL site: 18
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l GM5M9PGRFU01 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
GRFU V2 900MHz PGSM
This module will no longer be sold. Multicarrier RFU working at the 900 MHz PGSM frequency band:
l At a BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l GM5P9PGRFU01 (applying to the BTS3900AL)
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. l UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz
l At a BTS3900 AL site: 18
l It can work in GSM mode. l GM5M9EGRFU02 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) l GM5P9EGRFU02 (applying to the BTS3900AL)
GRFU V2 900MHz EGSM
This module will no longer be sold. Multicarrier RFU working at the 900 MHz EGSM frequency band: l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz
l At a BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L site: 12 l At a BTS3900 AL site: 18
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l It can work in GSM mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l GM5M9PGRFU02 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
GRFU V2 900MHz PGSM
Multi-carrier RFU working at the 900 MHz PGSM frequency band:
l At a BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
l GM5P9PGRFU02 (applying to the BTS3900AL)
l UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz
l At a BTS3900 AL site: 18
l It can work in GSM mode. l GM5M9EGRFU04 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
GRFU V2 900MHz EGSM
Multi-carrier RFU working at the 900 MHz EGSM frequency band: l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
l GM5P9EGRFU04 (applying to the BTS3900AL)
l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz
l At a BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L site: 12 l At a BTS3900 AL site: 18
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l It can work in GSM mode. GM5M9EDRFU00 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
DRFU 900MHz EGSM
DRFU working with a 35 MHz bandwidth at the 900 MHz EGSM band: l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
l At a BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L site: 12 l At a BTS3900 AL site: 18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
62
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
GM5M9PDRFU00
DRFU 900MHz PGSM
DRFU working with a 25 MHz bandwidth at the 900 MHz PGSM band:
l At a BTS3900 / BTS3900 A/ BTS3900 L site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
(applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
l UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM mode.
l At a BTS3900 AL site: 18
RRUs Working at Band 8 (900 MHz Frequency Band) The following table lists RRU configurations. Table 4-22 RRU configurations Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M9E39 5900
RRU3959 for Multi-mode 900 MHz EGSM
RRU3959, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz EGSM band:
DBS3900: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.
BTS3900C: 1 BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L: 6 BTS3900AL: 9
l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs
63
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M9P392 900
RRU3929 for Multi-Mode 900MHz PGSM
RRU3929 working at the 900 MHz PGSM frequency band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. l UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz
At a BTS3900C site: 1 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode. WD5M9E39 2931
RRU3929 for Multi-Mode 900MHz EGSM
RRU3929 working at the 900 MHz EGSM frequency band: l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz
DBS3900: 12 At a BTS3900C site: 1 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode. WD5M9E39 2800
RRU3928 for Multi-Mode 900MHz EGSM
RRU3928 working at the 900 MHz EGSM frequency band: l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
At a DBS3900 site: 12 At a BTS3900C site: 1 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
GM6M9PDR RU00
RRU3004 900MHz PGSM
RRU3004 working at the 900 MHz PGSM frequency band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM mode.
GM6M9EDR RU00
RRU3004 900MHz EGSM
RRU3004 working at the 900 MHz EGSM frequency band:
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. At a DBS3900 site: 12
l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM mode.
GM6M9PGR RU04
RRU3008 900MHz PGSM
RRU3008 V2 working at the 900 MHz PGSM frequency band:
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. At a DBS3900 site: 12
l UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
65
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
GM6M9EGR RU06
RRU3008 900MHz EGSM
RRU3008 V2 working at the 900 MHz EGSM frequency band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM mode.
WD5M9PM RRU04
RRU V2 for Multi-Mode 900MHz PGSM
RRU3908 V2 working at the 900 MHz PGSM frequency band: l UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. At a DBS3900 site: 12 At a BTS3900C site: 1 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9 WD5M9EM RRU03
RRU V2 for Multi-Mode 900MHz EGSM
RRU3908 V2 working at the 900 MHz EGSM frequency band: l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
At a DBS3900 site: 12 At a BTS3900C site: 1 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M9P392 600
RRU3926 for Multi-mode 900MHz PGSM
RRU3926 working at the 900 MHz PGSM frequency band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. l UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, or GU SDR mode.
At a BTS3900C site: 1 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9 WD5M9E39 2600
RRU3926 for Multi-mode 900MHz EGSM
RRU3926 working at the 900 MHz EGSM frequency band: l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, or GU SDR mode.
At a DBS3900 site: 12 At a BTS3900C site: 1 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M9P393 600
RRU3936 for Multi-mode 900MHz PGSM
RRU3936, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz PGSM frequency band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. l UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
At a BTS3900C site: 1 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9 WD5M9E39 3600
RRU3936 for Multi-mode 900MHz EGSM
RRU3936, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz EGSM frequency band: l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. l UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
At a DBS3900 site: 12 At a BTS3900C site: 1 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M9P393 800
RRU3938 for Multi-Mode 900MHz PGSM
RRU3938, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz PGSM frequency band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. l UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode. WD5M9E39 3800
RRU3938 for Multi-Mode 900MHz EGSM
RRU3938, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz EGSM frequency band: l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. l UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9 At a DBS3900 site: 12 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
4.3.3 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz) This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 1800 MHz.
RFUs Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz) The following table lists the RFU configuration.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-23 RFU configuration External Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
l WD5M18MRFU32 (applicable to BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L)
MRFUe for MultiMode 1800MHz
Multimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz full band:
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A / BTS3900L site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x125 W.
l WD5P18MRFU32 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
BTS3900A L cabinet: 18
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785MHz; DL: 1805MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode. l WD5M18MRFU05 (applicable to BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L) l WD5P18MRFU05 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
MRFUd for MultiMode 1800 MHz
This module is no longer sold after GA of the enhanced MRFUd. Multimode RF modules working at the 1800 MHz full band: l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A / BTS3900L site: 12 BTS3900A L cabinet: 18
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785MHz; DL: 1805MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
l WD5M18MRFU07 (applicable to BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L)
MRFUd for MultiMode 1800MHz
Enhanced MRFUd working at the 1800 MHz band:
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A / BTS3900L site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l WD5MP18MRFU15 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785MHz; DL: 1805MHz to 1880 MHz
BTS3900A L cabinet: 18
l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode. WD5M18MRFU10
MRFUd for MultiMode 1800 MHz
MRFUd V6 working at 1800 MHz: l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A / BTS3900L site: 12 BTS3900A L cabinet: 18
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l It can work in GSM, LTE, or GL mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
l WD5M18MRFU03 (applicable to BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L)
RF Unit V2 for MultiMode 1800 MHz A
This module will no longer be sold. MRFU working at segment A of the 1800 MHz band:
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A / BTS3900L site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l WD5P18MRFU03 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
BTS3900A L cabinet: 18
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1770 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1875 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode. l WD5M18MRFU04 (applicable to BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L) l WD5P18MRFU04 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
RF Unit V2 for MultiMode 1800 MHz B
This module will no longer be sold. MRFU working at segment B of the 1800 MHz band: l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A / BTS3900L site: 12 BTS3900A L cabinet: 18
l UL: 1725 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1820 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximu m Quantity
l WD5M18MRFU06 (applicable to BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L)
RF Unit V2 for MultiMode 1800 MHz
Multimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz full band:
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A / BTS3900L site: 12
l WD5P18MRFU06 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
Configuration Principle
BTS3900A L cabinet: 18
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode. l GM5M18GRFU03 (applicable to BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L) l GM5P18GRFU03 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
GRFU V2 1800 MHz A
This module will no longer be sold. Multicarrier RFU working at segment A of the 1800 MHz band: l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A / BTS3900L site: 12 BTS3900A L cabinet: 18
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1770 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1875 MHz l It can work in GSM mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximu m Quantity
l GM5M18GRFU04 (applicable to BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L)
GRFU V2 1800 MHz B
This module will no longer be sold. Multicarrier RFU working at segment B of the 1800 MHz band:
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A / BTS3900L site: 12
l GM5P18GRFU04 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
Configuration Principle
BTS3900A L cabinet: 18
l UL: 1725 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1820 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in GSM mode. l GM5M18GRFU05 (applicable to BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L)
GRFU V2 1800M
Multi-carrier RFU working at the 1800 MHz full band: l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
l GM5P18GRFU05 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A / BTS3900L site: 12 BTS3900A L cabinet: 18
l It can work in GSM mode. GM5M18DRFU00 (applicable to BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L)
DRFU 1800 MHz
DRFU working at 1800 MHz: l Supporting the full 1800 MHz band l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A / BTS3900L site: 12 BTS3900A L cabinet: 18
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l It can work in GSM mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
RRUs Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz) The following table lists the RRU configuration. Table 4-24 RRU configuration External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
WD5M183 95300
RRU3953 for MultiMode 1800MHz
Blade RRU working at the 1800 MHz full band:
At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be 12 configured is determined by the number of sectors, number At a BTS3900C of carriers, and output power. site: 1
l The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. When working in GO mode, the module's maximum output power is 2x60 W. When working in another mode, its maximum output power is 2x80 W.
Configuration Principle
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
In GSM mode, this RRU supports the following features: VAMOS FR, VAMOS I&II, antenna frequency hopping, multidimensional interference cancellation combining (MICC), and 4-Way Receive Diversity (4WD).
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in GSM, LTE, or GL mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
WD5M183 953W0
RRU3953w for MultiMode 1800 MHz
Multimode blade RRU working at the 1800 MHz full band:
At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be 12 configured is determined by the number of sectors, number At a BTS3900C of carriers, and output power. site: 1
l The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. When working in GO mode, its maximum output power is 2x60 W. When working in another mode, its maximum output power is 2x80 W.
Configuration Principle
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
In GSM mode, this RF module supports the following features: VAMOS FR, VAMOS I&II, antenna frequency hopping, multidimensional interference cancellation combining (MICC), and 4-Way Receive Diversity (4WD).
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in GSM, LTE, or GL mode. l IBW is 75 MHz. You need to apply for this module, and it can be used only after the PIM interference analysis is performed for this module. WD5M183 92931
RRU3929 for MultiMode 1800 MHz
Multimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz full band: l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz
At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be 12 configured is determined by the number of sectors, number At a BTS3900C of carriers, and output power. site: 1 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
WD5M183 93900
RRU3939 for MultiMode 1800 MHz
RRU3939, blade RRU working at the 1800 MHz full band:
At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be 12 configured is determined by the number of sectors, number At a BTS3900/ of carriers, and output power. BTS3900A/
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.
BTS3900L site: 6 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
Configuration Principle
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in GSM, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode. WD5M183 95900
RRU3959 for MultiMode 1800MHz
RRU3959, blade RRU working at the 1800 MHz full band: l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.
At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be 12 configured is determined by the number of sectors, number At a BTS3900/ of carriers, and output power. BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in GSM, LTE, or GL mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
WD5M183 959W0
RRU3959w for MultiMode 1800MHz
RRU3959w, blade RRU working at the 1800 MHz full band:
At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be 12 configured is determined by the number of sectors, number At a BTS3900/ of carriers, and output power. BTS3900A/
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.
BTS3900L site: 6 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
Configuration Principle
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in GSM, LTE, or GL mode. l IBW is 75 MHz. You need to apply for this module, and it can be used only after the PIM interference analysis is performed for this module. WD5M183 92800
RRU3928 for MultiMode 1800 MHz
Multimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz full band: l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be 12 configured is determined by the number of sectors, number At a BTS3900C of carriers, and output power. site: 1 At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
GM6M18 DRRU00
RRU3004 1800 MHz
RRU3004 working at the 1800 MHz band: l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz
At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be 12 configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l It can work in GSM mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
78
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
WD5M18 GRRU00
RRU3008 1800 MHz A
RRU3008 V1 working at the lower 45 MHz segment of the 1800 MHz band:
At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be 12 configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1850 MHz
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l It can work in GSM mode. WD5M18 GRRU01
RRU3008 1800 MHz B
RRU3008 V1 working at the higher 45 MHz segment of the 1800 MHz band: l UL: 1740 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1835 MHz to 1880 MHz
At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be 12 configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l It can work in GSM mode. WD5M18 MRRU01
RRU for Multi-Mode 1800 MHz A
RRU3908 V1, multimode RF module working at the lower 45 MHz segment of the 1800 MHz band:
At a DBS3900 site: Select this package based on 12 the frequency band requirements. At a BTS3900C
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1850 MHz
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
l It can work in GSM, LTE, or GL SDR mode. The UMTS mode is supported in terms of hardware. WD5M18 MRRU02
RRU for Multi-Mode 1800 MHz B
Configuration Principle
RRU3908 V1, multimode RF module working at the lower 45 MHz segment of the 1800 MHz band: l UL: 1740 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1835 MHz to 1880 MHz
site: 1
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
l It can work in GSM, LTE, or GL SDR mode. The UMTS mode is supported in terms of hardware.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
WD5M183 92600
RRU3926 for MultiMode 1800 MHz
RRU3926 working at the 1800 MHz full band:
At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be 12 configured is determined by the number of sectors, number At a BTS3900C of carriers, and output power. site: 1
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
Configuration Principle
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
WD5M183 93600
RRU3936 Multi-Mode for 1800 MHz
RRU3936, multimode blade RRU working at the 1800 MHz full band: l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be 12 configured is determined by the number of sectors, number At a BTS3900C of carriers, and output power. site: 1 At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
WD5M183 93800
RRU3938 for MultiMode 1800 MHz
RRU3938 working at the 1800 MHz full band:
At a DBS3900 site: The number of packages to be 12 configured is determined by the number of sectors, number At a site using of carriers, and output power. BTS3900/
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, or GL SDR mode.
BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
Configuration Principle
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9 At a BTS3900C site: 1
WD5M2P3 952M0
RRU3952m for MultiMode 1800MHz
The RRU3952m is a multimode RF module supporting 1800 MHz and 2100 MHz inter-frequency mutual aid. It supports the 1.8 GHz 2T4R or 1.8 GHz 2T2R+2.1 GHz 2R configuration. Its maximum output power is 2x60 W. It supports the GO/LO/GL mode and works at any of the following frequency ranges: 1.8 GHz: UL 1710 to 1785 MHz; DL 1805 to 1880 MHz; 2.1 GHz: UL 1920 to 1980 MHz.
BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L:6 BTS3900AL:9 DBS3900:12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
4.3.4 RF Modules Working at Band 5 (850 MHz) This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 850 MHz.
RFUs Working at Band 5 (850 MHz) The following table lists the RFU configuration.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-25 RFU configuration External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l WD5M85MRFU00 (applicable to BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L)
RF Unit V2 for MultiMode 850 MHz
MRFU V2 working at the 850 MHz band:
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12
Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.
l WD5P85MRFU00 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
BTS3900AL cabinet: 18
l UL: 824 MHz to 846.5 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 891.5 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU SDR mode. l QWMMWRFU8500 (applicable to BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L) l QWMPWRFU8500 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
RF Unit for WCDMA 850MHz (80W)
WRFU working at segment A of the 850 MHz band: l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12 BTS3900AL cabinet: 18
l UL: 824 MHz to 835MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 880 MHz
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l It can work in UMTS mode.
RRUs Working at Band 5 (850 MHz) The following table lists the RRU configuration.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-26 RRU configuration External Model
Descript ion
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M85 393600
RRU3936 for MultiMode 850 MHz
RRU3936, multimode blade RRU working at the 850 MHz full band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
UL: 824MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU SDR mode.
At a BTS3900C site: 1 At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
For the specifications, see Technical Specifications of the RRU. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
WD5M85 395200
RRU3952 for MultiMode 850 MHz
Blade RRU, RRU3952 working at the 850 MHz frequency band: l The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.
At a DBS3900 site: 12
Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, GL SDR, or UL SDR mode. l It supports four carriers and four antennas.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descript ion
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M85 394200
RRU3942 for MultiMode 850 MHz
RRU3942 working at 850 MHz:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.
l The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
RRU3801E working at 850 MHz:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.
l UL: 824 MHz to 834 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 879 MHz
At a BTS3900C site: 1
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU SDR mode. l It supports four carriers and four antennas. QWEMR RU5A300
RRU for WCDMA 850 MHz (40 W)
l It can work in UMTS mode. l It supports a maximum of two carriers. The maximum output power is 40 W.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descript ion
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWEMR RU50200
RRU for WCDMA 850 MHz (60 W)
RRU3804 working at 850 MHz:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.
l UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz
At a BTS3900C site: 1
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l It supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W. l It can work in UMTS mode.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
WD5M85 MRRU02
RRU V2 for MultiMode 850 MHz
RRU3908 V2, multimode RF module working at 850 MHz: l UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU SDR mode.
At a DBS3900 site: 12
Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.
At a BTS3900C site: 1
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descript ion
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
GM6M85 GRRU00
RRU3008 850 MHz
RRU3008 V1 working at 850 MHz:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l It can work in GSM mode.
4.3.5 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz) This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 1900 MHz.
RFUs Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz) The following table lists the RFU configuration. Table 4-27 RFU configuration External Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l WD5M19MRFU01 (applicable to BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L)
RF Unit for MultiMode 1900 MHz A
MRFU V1 working at segment A of the 1900 MHz band:
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l WD5P19MRFU01 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. l UL: 1850 MHz to 1890 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz
At a BTS3900AL site: 18
l It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU SDR mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
l WD5M19MRFU02 (applicable to BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L)
RF Unit for MultiMode 1900 MHz B
MRFU V1 working at segment B of the 1900 M band:
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12
l WD5P19MRFU02 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. l UL: 1870 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz
Configuration Principle
At a BTS3900AL site: 18
l It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU SDR mode. l GM5M19GRFU00 (applicable to BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L) l GM5P19GRFU00 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
GRFU 1900MHz A
Multi-carrier RF module working at segment A of the 1900 MHz band: l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l UL: 1850 MHz to 1890 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz l It can work in GSM mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
l GM5M19GRFU01 (applicable to BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L)
GRFU 1900MHz B
Multi-carrier RF module working at segment B of the 1900 MHz band:
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
l GM5P19GRFU01 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
Configuration Principle
At a BTS3900AL site: 18
l UL: 1870 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz l It can work in GSM mode.
RRUs Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz) The following table lists the RRU configuration. Table 4-28 RRU configuration External Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
GM6M19 GRRU00
RRU3008 1900 MHz A
RRU3008 V1 working at the lower 40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l UL: 1850 MHz to 1890 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l It can work in GSM mode. GM6M19 GRRU01
RRU3008 1900 MHz B
RRU3008 V1 working at the higher 40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
l UL: 1870 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz l It can work in GSM mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
88
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M19 MRRU01
RRU for Multi-Mode 1900 MHz A
RRU3908 V1, multimode RF module working at the lower 40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.
l UL: 1850 MHz to 1890 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6
l It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU SDR mode.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
WD5M19 MRRU02
RRU for Multi-Mode 1900 MHz B
At a BTS3900C site: 1
RRU3908 V1, multimode RF module working at the higher 40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz band:
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l UL: 1870 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU SDR mode. QWEMR RU20300
RRU for WCDMA 1900 MHz (40 W)
RRU3801E working at 1900 MHz:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
l UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz
At a BTS3900C site: 1
l It supports a maximum of two carriers. The maximum output power is 40 W. l It can work in UMTS mode.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWEMR RU20200
RRU for WCDMA 1900 MHz (60 W)
RRU3804 working at 1900 MHz:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
l UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz
At a BTS3900C site: 1
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l It supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W. l It can work in UMTS mode.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
WD5M19 394200
RRU3942 for Multi-Mode 1900 MHz
RRU3942 working at 1900 MHz:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
l The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
l It supports a maximum of two sectors in 1T2R mode.
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, GL SDR, or UL SDR mode. l It supports four carriers and four antennas.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M19 393600
RRU3936 for Multi-Mode 1900 MHz
RRU3936, multimode blade RRU working at the 1900 MHz full band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, GL SDR, or UL SDR mode.
At a BTS3900C site: 1 At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
For the specifications, see Technical Specifications of the RRU
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
WD5M19 395300
RRU3953 for Multi-Mode 1900 MHz
Blade RRU, RRU3953 working at the 1900 MHz frequency band: l It works in 2T4R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x80 W. When working in GO mode, its maximum output power is 2x60 W or 40 W+80 W. When working in another mode, its maximum output power is 2x80 W.
At a DBS3900 site: 12 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs
l It supports a maximum of two sectors in 1T2R mode. l UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz l It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU SDR, GL SDR, or UL SDR mode. l It supports four carriers and four antennas.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
4.3.6 RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz) This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 2100 MHz.
RFUs Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz) The following table lists the RFU configuration. Table 4-29 RFU configuration External Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l QWMMWRFUA100 (applicable to BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L)
WRFUa for WCDMA 2100 MHz (1x100 W)
RF module working at 2100 MHz:
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l QWMPWRFUA100 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x100 W. l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
At a BTS3900AL site: 18
l It can work in UMTS mode. l QWMMWRFU8101 (applicable to BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L) l QWMPWRFU2100 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
WRFUe for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x80 W)
RF module working at 2100 MHz: l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l It can work in UMTS mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l QWMMWRFU6100 (applicable to BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L)
WRFUd for WCDMA 2100MHz (2x60W)
RF module working at 2100 MHz:
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l QWMPWRFU6100 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
At a BTS3900AL site: 18
l It can work in UMTS mode. l QWMMWRFU8102 (applicable to BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L) l QWMPWRFU1101 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
RF Unit for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)
RF module working at the 2100 MHz frequency band (enhanced module of the WRFU whose output power is 80 W): l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz l It can work in UMTS mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l QWMMWRFU4100 (applicable to BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L)
RF Unit for WCDMA 2100 MHz (40 W)
RF module working at 2100 MHz:
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l QWMPWRFU4100 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x40 W. l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
At a BTS3900AL site: 18
l It can work in UMTS mode. l QWMMWRFU8100 (applicable to BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L) l QWMPWRFU8100 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
RF Unit for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)
RF module working at 2100 MHz: l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
RRUs Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz) The following table lists the RRU configuration.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-30 RRU configuration External Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M21 382400
RRU3824 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (60 W)
RRU3824, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x60 W.
At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9
l It can work in UMTS mode.
WD5M21 382401
RRU3824 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (60 W)
Enhanced RRU3824, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz: l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x60 W.
WD5M21 382600
RRU3826 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9 At a DBS3900 site: 12 At a BTS3900C site: 1 At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9
l It can work in UMTS mode.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
RRU3826, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9
l It can work in UMTS mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a BTS3900C site: 1
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M21 382601
RRU3826 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)
Enhanced RRU3826, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
WD5M21 383200
RRU3832 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x60 W, 2T4R)
At a BTS3900C site: 1 At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9
l It can work in UMTS mode.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
RRU3832, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
l The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz l It can work in UMTS mode. NOTE The RRU3832 supports two receive channels in RAN12.0 and RAN13.0 and supports four carriers in RAN12.0.
WD5M21 383900
RRU3839 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x60 W)
RRU3839, blade RRU working at the 2100 MHz frequency band: l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
At a DBS3900 site: 12 At a BTS3900C site: 1 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l It can work in UMTS mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M21 383800
RRU3838 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x40 W)
RRU3838, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.
At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9
l It can work in UMTS or LTE mode. NOTE The RRU3838 only supports four carriers in RAN12.0.
WD5M21 382900
RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x60 W)
RRU3829 working at 2100 MHz: l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
At a DBS3900 site: 12 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6 At a BTS3900AL site: 9 At a BTS3900C site: 1
l It can work in UMTS mode. NOTE The RRU3829 only supports four carriers in RAN12.0.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. It supports a maximum of six UMTS carriers and its total output power is 2x60 W.
97
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M21 MRRU00
RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x40 W)
RRU3828 working at 2100 MHz:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.
At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9
l It can work in UMTS mode. NOTE The RRU3828 only supports four carriers in RAN12.0.
QWEMR RU10300
RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (40 W)
At a BTS3900C site: 1
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
RRU3801E working at 2100 MHz, which has entered the EOM phase: l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz l It supports a maximum of two carriers. The maximum output power is 40 W.
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l It can work in UMTS mode. QWEMR RU10200
RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (60 W)
RRU3804 working at 2100 MHz, which has entered the EOM phase: l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz l It supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W.
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l It can work in UMTS mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
External Model
Description
Function
QWEMR RU10700
RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)
RRU3806 working at 2100 MHz, which has entered the EOM phase:
4 Product Configuration
Maximum Quantity
l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz l It supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 80 W.
Configuration Principle The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l It can work in UMTS mode. QWEMR RU10800
RRU for WCDMA/LTE 2100 MHz (2x40 W)
RRU3808 working at 2100 MHz: l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz l It can work in UMTS or LTE mode.
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
4.3.7 RF Modules Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz) This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 7 (2600 MHz frequency band).
RFUs Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz Frequency Band) The following table lists RFU configurations.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-31 RFU configurations Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l WD5M26LRFU0C (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
RFU for LTE 2600M C (2x40W)
LRFU working at segment C of the 2600 MHz frequency band:
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l WD5P26LRFU0C (applying to the BTS3900AL)
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. l UL: 2500 MHz to 2520 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2640 MHz
At a BTS3900A L site: 18
l It can work in LTE mode. l WD5M26LRFU0E (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) l WD5P26LRFU0E (applying to the BTS3900AL)
RFU for LTE 2600M E (2x40W)
LRFU working at segment E of the 2600 MHz frequency band: l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. l UL: 2550 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2670 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descripti on
Function
l WD5M26LRFU00 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
RFU for LTE 2600M D (2x40W)
LRFU working at segment D of the 2600 MHz frequency band:
l WD5P26LRFU00 (applying to the BTS3900AL)
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. l UL: 2510 MHz to 2560 MHz; DL: 2630 MHz to 2680 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
RRUs Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz Frequency Band) The following table lists RRU configurations. Table 4-32 RRU configurations Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M26 324000
RRU3240 for LTE 2600MHz (2x40W, 2T4R)
RRU3240 working at the 2600 MHz frequency band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M26 LRRU0C
RRU for LTE 2600M C (2x40W)
RRU3201 working at segment C of the 2600 MHz frequency band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l UL: 2500 MHz to 2520 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2640 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9 WD5M26 LRRU0D
RRU for LTE 2600M D (2x40W)
RRU3201 working at segment D of the 2600 MHz frequency band: l UL: 2510 MHz to 2560 MHz; DL: 2630 MHz to 2680 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
At a DBS3900 site: 12 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M26 LRRU0E
RRU for LTE 2600M E (2x40W)
RRU3201 working at segment E of the 2600 MHz frequency band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l UL: 2550 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2670 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9 WD5M26 LRRU68
RRU for LTE 2600MHz (2x40W)
RRU3268, blade RRU working at the 2600 MHz frequency band: l Its maximum output power is 2x40 W. l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
At a DBS3900 site: 12 At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M26 326000
RRU for LTE 2600MHz (2x40W, 2T4R)
RRU3260, blade RRU working at the 2600 MHz frequency band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
WD5M26 326200
RRU for LTE 2600MHz (2x60W, 2T4R)
RRU3262 working at the 2600 MHz frequency band: l The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9 At a DBS3900 site: l 18 (when the BBU is installed in a rack)
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l 12 (when the BBU is installed in the APM30H)
l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
4.3.8 RF Modules Working at Band 4 (AWS) This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 4 (AWS).
RFUs Working at Band 4 (AWS) The following table lists the RFU configuration.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-33 RFU configuration External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
l QCYMAWSRFU01 (applicable to BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L)
CRFUd for LTE AWS (2x60 W)
RF module working at the AWS band: l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900 A, or BTS3900 L cabinet: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHz
BTS3900 AL cabinet: 18
l QCYPAWSRFU01 (applicable to BTS3900AL)
l It can work in LTE mode.
RRUs Working at Band 4 (AWS) The following table lists the RRU configuration. Table 4-34 RRU configuration External Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5MA W384100
RRU for LTE AWS (4T4R, 2x60 W/4x30 W)
RRU3841 working at the AWS band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l It works in 4T4R mode and provides maximum output power of 2x60 W or 4x30 W.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHz
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l It can work in LTE mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
QWEMRR U40200
RRU for WCDMA AWS (60 W)
RRU3804 working at the AWS band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHz
At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l It supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W. l It can work in UMTS mode. QWEMRR U40800
RRU for WCDMA/LTE AWS (2x40 W)
At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
RRU3808 working at the AWS band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHz
At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
l It can work in UMTS, LTE, or UL SDR mode.
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900C site: 1
At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9 WD5M213 83200
RRU3832 for AWS (2x60 W)
RRU3832, blade RRU working at the AWS band l The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHz
At a DBS3900 site: 12 At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6 At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l It can work in UMTS, LTE, or UL SDR mode.
4.3.9 RF Modules Working at Band 12 (700 MHz) This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules supporting band 12 (700 MHz). Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
RRUs Supporting Band 12 (700 MHz) The following table lists the RRU configuration. Table 4-35 RRU configuration External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M07L RRU00
RRU for LTE 700 MHz (2x40 W)
RRU3203 supporting band 12 (700 MHz):
In a DBS3900: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.
In a BTS3900/BTS3900A/ BTS3900L: 6 In a BTS3900AL: 9
l UL: 698 MHz to 716 MHz; DL: 728 MHz to 746 MHz
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l It can work in LTE mode.
4.3.10 RF Modules Working at Band 13 (700 MHz) This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules supporting band 13 (700 MHz).
RRUs Supporting Band 13 (700 MHz) The following table lists the RRU configuration. Table 4-36 RRU configuration External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M07L RRU01
RRU for LTE 700 MHz (2x40 W)
RRU3201 supporting band 13 (700 MHz):
In a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L: 6
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.
In a BTS3900AL: 9
l UL: 776 MHz to 787 MHz; DL: 746 MHz to 757 MHz
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l It can work in LTE mode. Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M0732 6900
RRU for LTE 700MHz (2x60W)
RRU3269 working at band 12 and band 13(700 MHz frequency band):
DBS3900: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.
BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L: 6 BTS3900AL: 9
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l Band13, UL: 776MHz to 787MHz; DL: 746MHz to 757MHz l Band12, UL: 699MHz to 716MHz; DL: 729MHz to 746MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
4.3.11 RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz) This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 800 MHz.
RFUs Working at Band 20 (800 MHz) The following table lists the RFU configuration. Table 4-37 RFU configuration External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l WD5M08LRFU0E (applicable to BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L)
LRFU for LTE 800 MHz (2x60 W)
LRFUe working at 800 MHz:
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l WD5P08LRFU0E (applicable to BTS3900AL)
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.
BTS3900AL cabinet: 18
l UL: 832 MHz to 862 MHz; DL: 791 MHz to 821 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
RRUs Working at Band 20 (800 MHz) The following table lists the RRU configuration. Table 4-38 RRU configuration External Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5MD8L RRU0A
RRU for LTE 800 MHz A (2x40 W)
RRU3220 working at segment A of the 800 MHz band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l UL: 832 MHz to 847 MHz; DL: 791 MHz to 806 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
WD5MD8L RRU0B
WD5MD8L RRU00
RRU for LTE 800 MHz B (2x40 W)
RRU for LTE 800 MHz (2x40 W)
RRU3220 working at segment B of the 800 MHz band:
At a BTS3900C site: 1 At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
l It can work in LTE mode.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9
RRU3222 working at the 800 MHz frequency band:
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
l UL: 842 MHz to 862 MHz; DL: 801 MHz to 821 MHz
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
l UL: 832 MHz to 862 MHz; DL: 791 MHz to 821 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descripti on
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M08LR RU68
RRU for LTE 800 MHz (2x40 W)
RRU3268, blade RRU working at the 800 MHz full band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l The maximum output power is 2x40 W. l UL: 832 MHz to 847 MHz; DL: 791 MHz to 806 MHz It can work in LTE mode.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
At a site using BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9 At a BTS3900AL site: 9
4.3.12 RF Modules Working at Band 28 (700 MHz) This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 28 (700 MHz).
Configuration of RRUs Working at Band 28 (APT700) The following table lists RRU configurations. Table 4-39 RRU configurations Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M07LR RU02
RRU for LTE APT700 (2T2R, 2x40 W)
RRU3268 working at the APT700 band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
It works in 2T2R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x40 W.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l UL: 703 MHz to 743 MHz DL: 758 MHz to 798 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
110
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD5M07LR RU03
RRU for LTE APT700 (2T2R, 2x40 W)
RRU3268 working at the APT700 band:
At a DBS3900 site: 12
It works in 2T2R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x40 W.
At a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/ BTS3900L site: 6
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l UL: 718 MHz to 748 MHz DL: 773 MHz to 803 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
At a BTS3900AL site: 9
For detailed specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
RFUs Working at Band 28 (APT700) The following table lists RFU configurations. Table 4-40 RFU configurations Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l WD5M07 LRFU01 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900 A, and BTS3900L )
RFU for LTE APT700 (2x80W)
LRFUe working at the lower 40 MHz segment of band 28 (APT700M):
BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
l WD5P07L RFU01 (applying to the BTS3900 AL)
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. l UL: 703 MHz to 743 MHz l DL: 758 MHz to 798 MHz
At a BTS3900AL site: 18
l It can work in LTE mode.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
Model
Descriptio n
Function
l WD5M07 LRFU02 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900 A, and BTS3900L )
RFU for LTE APT700 (2x80W)
LRFUe working at the higher 30MHz segment of Band 28 (APT700M):
4 Product Configuration
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
l The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. l UL: 718 MHz to 748 MHz l DL: 773 MHz to 803 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
l WD5P07L RFU02 (applying to the BTS3900 AL)
4.4 AAU Configuration This section describes the AAU configuration principles.
4.4.1 AAU3910 Configurations This section describes the AAU3910 configuration principles.
RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz) The following table lists the principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 2 (1800 MHz).
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-41 Principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 2 (1800 MHz) Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD7M18M AAU00
AAU3910 1800 MHz (2T2R, 2x63 dBm), 1710 to 1880 MHz (UP), 1920 to 2170 MHZ/2500 to 2690 MHz (DOWN)
1.8 A (2T2R)+2.1/2.6 P:
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU.
l An RU3938 is used, which is in 2T2R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x40 W.
For carrier power specifications of the RU3938, see technical specifications of the RRU3938.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in LTE mode. l It can provide a 4-port broadband antenna of 2100 MHz/2600 MHz for external RRUs and RFUs.
RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz) The following table lists the principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 1 (2100 MHz). Table 4-42 Principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 1 (2100 MHz) Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD7M21W AAU00
AAU3910 2100 MHz (2T4R, 2x65 dBm), 1920 to 2170 MHz (UP), 1710 to 1880 MHz/2500 to 2690 MHZ (DOWN)
2.1 A (2T4R)+1.8/2.6 P:
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU.
l An RU3832 is used, which is in 2T4R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x60 W. l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz l It can work in UMTS mode.
For carrier power specifications of the RU3832, see technical specifications of the RRU3832.
l It can provide a 4-port broadband antenna of 1800 MHz/2600 MHz for external RRUs and RFUs.
RF Modules Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz) The following table lists the principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 7 (2600 MHz). Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-43 Principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 1 (2600 MHz) Model
Description
Function
Maximu m Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD7M26LA AU00
AAU3910 2600 MHz (2T4R, 2x63 dBm), 2500 to 2690 MHz (UP), 1710 to 2170 MHz (DOWN)
2.6 A (2T4R)+PCS/1.8/2.1/AWS P:
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU.
l An RU3260 is used, which is in 2T4R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x40 W.
For carrier power specifications of the RU3260, see technical specifications of the RRU3260.
l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode. l It can provide a 4-port broadband antenna of PCS/1800 MHz/2100 MHz/AWS for external RRUs and RFUs.
WD7M26LA AU01
AAU3910 2600 MHz (2T2R, 2x63 dBm), 2500 to 2690 MHz (UP), 1710 to 2170 MHz (DOWN)
2.6 A (2T2R)+PCS/1.8/2.1/AWS P: l An RU3268 is used, which is in 2T2R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x40 W. l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode. l It can provide a 4-port broadband antenna of PCS/1800 MHz/2100 MHz/AWS for external RRUs and RFUs.
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU. For carrier power specifications of the RU3268, see technical specifications of the RRU3268.
RF Modules Working at Band 4 (AWS) The following table lists the principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 4 (AWS).
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-44 Principles for configuring RF modules working at Band 4 (AWS) Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD7MAW SAAU00
AAU3910 AWS (2T4R, 2x65 dBm), 1710 to 1770 MHz/ 2110 to 2170 MHz (UP), 1850 to 1990 MHz (DOWN)
AWS A (2T4R)+PCS P:
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU.
l An RU3832 is used, which is in 2T4R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x60 W.
For carrier power specifications of the RU3832, see technical specifications of the RRU3832.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHz l It can work in UMTS, LTE, or UL mode. l It can provide a 4-port antenna of PCS for external RRUs or RFUs.
RF Modules Working at Mixed Frequency Bands RUs working in 1800 MHz, 2100 MHz, and 2600 MHz frequency bands can form 2 A configurations (high-frequency module in the upper slot and low-frequency module in the lower slot), as listed in the following table. Table 4-45 Principles for configuring RF modules working in mixed frequency bands Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quanti ty
Configuration Principle
WD7MWMJ AAU00
AAU3910 2100 MHz+1800 MHz (2T4R, 2x65 dBm, 2T2R, 2x63dBm), 1920 to 2170 MHz (UP), 1710 to 1880 MHz/2500 to 2690 MHz (DOWN)
2.1 A (2T4R)+1.8 A (2T2R)
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU.
An RU3938 is used as a 1.8 A RF module: l It works in 2T2R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x40 W. l UL: 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz; DL: 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in LTE mode. An RU3832 is used as a 2.1 A RF module: l It works in 2T4R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x60 W.
For carrier power specifications of the RU3938 and RU3832, see technical specifications of the RRU3938 and RRU3832, respectively.
l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz l It can work in UMTS mode. Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quanti ty
Configuration Principle
WD7MWLJ AAU00
AAU3910 2600 MHz+2100 MHz (2T4R, 2x63 dBm, 2T4R, 2x65 dBm), 2500 to 2690 MHz (UP), 1710 to 2170 MHz (DOWN)
2.6 A (2T4R) + 2.1 A (2T4R)
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU.
An RU3832 is used as a 2.1 A RF module: l It works in 2T4R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x60 W.
For carrier power specifications of the RU3832 and RU3260, see technical specifications of the RRU3832 and RRU3260.
l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz l It can work in UMTS mode. An RU3260 is used as the 2.6 A RF module. l It works in 2T4R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x40 W. l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
WD7MLMJ AAU00
AAU3910 2600 MHz+1800 MHz (2T4R, 2x63 dBm, 2T4R, 2x63 dBm), 2500 to 2690 MHz (UP), 1710 to 2170 MHz (DOWN)
2.6 A (2T4R) + 1.8 A (2T2R) An RU3938 is used as a 1.8 A RF module: l It works in 2T2R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x40 W. l UL: 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz; DL: 1710 MHz to 1880 MHz l It can work in LTE mode. An RU3260 is used as the 2.6 A RF module. l It works in 2T4R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x40 W.
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU. For carrier power specifications of the RU3938 and RU3260, see technical specifications of the RRU3938 and RRU3260, respectively.
l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode.
4.4.2 AAU3902 Configurations This section describes configuration principles, typical configurations, and typical conversions of an AAU3902.
AAU3902 Configuration Principles The AAU3902 configuration principles are as follows:
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
l
Each sector needs to be configured with an AAU3902. The number of RF modules is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l
The AAU3902 is an antenna with horizontal beamwidth of 65°, and therefore does not apply to an omni-directional site.
l
In sector splitting scenarios, the 4RXD mode (1T4R/2T4R/4T4R) is not supported. Therefore, the configuration of six sectors is not supported.
l
For RU44-2.1G – If a sector is not split, an AAU3902 supports one sector with a horizontal beamwidth of 65 degrees, and an RU44-2.1G supports a maximum of eight 1T2R carriers or four 2T2R/2T4R carriers (if 4R is required). – If a sector is split vertically, an AAU3902 supports two sectors, each with a horizontal beamwidth of 65 degrees, and an RU44-2.1G supports a maximum of four 1T2R carriers or four 2T2R carriers. It does not support 1T4R and 2T4R carriers. – The WBBPf1-4 is recommended. In 4RX mode, the WBBPb and WBBPd only support small specifications, and they do not support CPRI MUX. Therefore, the WBBPf is recommended in 4RX mode.
l
For RU44-1.8 G – The LTE mode supports the AAS vertical sector splitting and vertical four receive features. – The GSM mode does not support the AAS vertical sector splitting and vertical four receive features. – It is recommended that the UBBP be used to support multiple modes because the 1800 MHz RU44 does not have a baseband processing unit. – The AAU3902 can be used in eGBTS sites rather than GBTS sites. Therefore, the UMPT must be configured.
l
An AAU3902 with one active unit can be transited to support two active units. For example, – an 1800 MHz RU44 can be added to an AAU3902 with the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P +(1710 to 2690) P configuration to support the 2100 A+1800 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration, – or a 2600 MHz RU44 can be added to convert the AAU3902 so that the AAU3902 supports the 2100 A+2600 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration.
Typical configuration of an AAU3902 The following table lists the typical configurations of an AAU3902. Table 4-46 Typical configurations of an AAU3902 Typical Configurations
MU02
RU44-2.1 G
RU44-1.8 G
PU22
CU01
Supporting Version
2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P
1
1
0
1
1
SRAN8.0
2100 A+ 1800 A+ (790 to 960) P+ (1710 to 2690) P
1
1
1
1
0
SRAN9.0
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Typical Configurations
MU02
RU44-2.1 G
RU44-1.8 G
PU22
CU01
Supporting Version
1800 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P
1
0
1
1
0
SRAN9.0
The typical configuration of an AAU3902 is 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P. Its package contains an RU44 of 2100 MHz. It can connect to a high-frequency RRU/RFU and a low-frequency RRU/RFU. The following table shows the configuration. Table 4-47 Principles for configuring an AAU3902 External Model
Description
Function
Configuration Principle
WD7MR44M0200
2100 A+(790 to 960) P +(1710 to 2690) P
AAU3902 RU44-2100 MHz (2x63 dBm), 790 MHz to 960 MHz, 1710 MHz to 2690 MHz
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. A package consists of an AU02V, an RU44-2.1G, an MU02, a PU22, and a CU.
WD7MR44M0218
1800 A+(790 to 960) P +(1710 to 2690) P
AAU3902 RU44-1800 MHz (2x63 dBm), 790 to 960 MHz, 1710 to 2690 MHz
The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. A package consists of an AU02V, an RU44-1.8G, an MU02, a PU22, and a CU.
The typical configuration of an SRAN9.0 AAU3902 is 1800 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P. Its package contains an RU44 of 1800 MHz. It can connect to a high-frequency RRU/RFU and a low-frequency RRU/RFU, as shown in the following figure.
Typical AAU3902 Conversion An AAU3902 with one active unit can be converted to support two active units. For example, an 1800 MHz RU44 can be added to an AAU3902 with the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration to convert the AAU3902 so that the AAU3902 supports the 2100 A+1800 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration, or a 2600 MHz RU44can be added to convert the AAU3902 so that the AAU3902 supports the 2100 A+2600 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration. The following figure shows the conversion.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Figure 4-17 AAU3902 conversion
4.4.3 AAU3920 Configurations This section describes configuration principles and typical configurations of the AAU3920.
Principles for Configuring an AAU3920 The AAU3920 configuration principles are as follows: l
The baseband processing boards can be configured for UMTS are WBBPb1 to WBBPb4, WBBPd1 to WBBPd3, and WBBPf1 to WBBPf4. In 4RX mode, the WBBPb and WBBPd only support small specifications, and they do not support CPRI MUX. Therefore, the WBBPf is recommended in 4RX mode.
l
A UBBPd can be configured as a baseband processing board in LTE mode to support UL mode.
l
The AAU3920 supports a -48 V DC power supply socket and does not support power cascading.
l
The passive antennas of the AAU3920 can be used on devices provided by Huawei or customers.
The AAU3920's CPRI configuration principles are as follows: l
The active RU configured on the AAU3920 provides two CPRI ports to connect to BBUs. Each CPRI port supports a rate of 9.8 Gbit/s. For LO/UL base stations in wideband 2x2T4R mode, the 2:1 Compression and CPRI MUX features need to be supported.
l
Multiple AAU3920s cannot be cascaded because of bandwidth limitation. In small bandwidth configuration scenarios, three sectors supported by one base station can be cascaded. In this case, a maximum of three cascading levels are supported. During the cascading, you need to consider the number of cells supported by CPRI bandwidth and CPRI port adaptive capabilities.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
l
It is not recommended that active and passive modules be cascaded by connecting CPRI ports.
l
The AAU3920 is configured with 9.8 Gbit/s optical modules by default.
The AAU3920 electrical tilt configuration principles are as follows: l
Different modes in same frequency band must use the same downtilt.
l
The electrical tilt is adjusted independently on 2T working at 1.8 GHz and 2.1 GHz.
l
The downtilt of the 2.6 GHz 2T cannot be independently adjusted in RET mode. 2.6 GHz 2T must use the same downtilt with 1.8 GHz 2T. For 2.6 GHz 4T, one 2.6 GHz 2T must use the same downtilt with 1.8 GHz 2T, and other 2.6 GHz 2T must use the same downtilt with 2.1 GHz 2T.
l
Determine the principles for sharing the same downtilt and independent electrical tilt according to the network planning and optimization requirements.
Typical Configuration of an AAU3920 The following table shows the carrier configuration of the AAU3920. Table 4-48 Carrier configuration of the AAU3920 Description
Function
Working Mode
Configuration Capacity
1.8 GHz (GSM +LTE)+2.1 GHz (LTE+UMTS)
1.8 GHz (UL: 1710~1785 MHz, DL: 1805~1880 MHz) +2.1 GHz (UL: 1920~1980 MHz, DL: 2110~2170 MHz)
Single band mode (1.8 GHz)
GSM 8C 1T2R+LTE 1C 2x20 MHz 2T4R or 2T2R
Single band mode (2.1 GHz)
UMTS 4C 2T4R or 2T2R
Dual band mode (1.8 GHz +2.1 GHz)
1.8 GHz LTE 2C+2.1 GHz UMTS 4C (without MIMO)
GSM 4C 1T2R+LTE 2C 2x20 MHz 2T4R or 2T2R
UMTS 8C 1T2R or 1T4R
1.8 GHz LTE 2C+2.1 GHz UMTS 2C (without MIMO) 1.8 GHz GSM 6C+LTE 1C+2.1 GHz UMTS 2C (without MIMO) 1.8 GHz GSM 6C+LTE 1C+2.1 GHz UMTS 1C (MIMO) 1.8 GHz GSM 4C+LTE 1C+2.1 GHz UMTS 4C (without MIMO) 1.8 GHz GSM 4C+LTE 1C+2.1 GHz UMTS 3C (MIMO) 1.8 GHz GSM 3C+LTE 1C+2.1 GHz UMTS 3C (without MIMO)
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
The following table lists AAU3920 configuration. Table 4-49 AAU3920 configuration Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD7MAA U39200
Functional moduleAAU3920WD7MJRTAGX0 A-RUa3920-1800 MHz+2100 MHz (2*67 dBm),2500 MHz-2690 MHz
1.8 GHz+2.1 GHz (2T4R):
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU.
l The wideband 2T4R module is used and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. l TX: 1805-1880 MHz, RX: 1710-1785 MHz/TX: 2110-2170 MHz, RX: 1920-1980 MHz
For carrier power specifications of the AAU3920, see technical specifications of the AAU3920.
l It can work in UMTS or LTE mode.
4.4.4 AAU3911 Configurations Configurations of RF Module 1A Working at Band 3 (1800 MHz) The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at band 3 (1800 MHz).
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-50 RF Modules Working at Band 3 (1800 MHz) Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD7METBN 2000
AAU3911,1800 MHz 2T4R', 2*60W(UP) + 1.8G/2.1G Combiner 4path (DOWN);
1.8 GHz A 2T4R' 2x60 W (RU3952m)+2.1 GHz P (4-port)+2.6 GHz P (4-port) 700~900 P (2port):
6
The RU3952m is configured to work at a single frequency band (1.8 GHz) in 2T4R mode. It uses four DIN connectors (A/B/ C/D). Its configuration scheme is the same as the 2T4R module. The 2.1 GHz 2R channel of the RU3952m is not functional.
Antenna 1710~2170MHz (UP), 2500~26900M Hz/ 690~960MHz (DOWN)
l The RU3952m is used to support interfrequency mutual aid. Its maximum output power is 2x60 W and it works at 1800 MHz (UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz) in 2T4R mode. l It can work in GSM, LTE, or GL mode. l It can provide the following wideband antennas for external RRUs or RFUs: 4port 2.1 GHz antenna (the ports are provided by the 1.8/2.1 GHz external combiner in the lower slot), 4-port 2.6 GHz antenna (the ports are on the bottom of the antenna), and 2-port 700 MHz/900 MHz antenna (the ports are on the bottom of the antenna).
For carrier power specifications of the RU3952m, see technical specifications of the RRU3952m.
Configurations of RF Module 1A Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz) The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at band 1 (2100 MHz).
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-51 Principles for configuring RF modules working at band 1 (2100 MHz) Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quan tity
Configuration Principle
WD7MI TBO200 0
AAU3911,210 0MHz 2T4R', 2*60W(UP) + 1.8G/2.1G Combiner 4path (DOWN);
2.1 GHz A 2T4R' 2x60 W (RU3832m)+1.8 GHz P (4port)+2.6 GHz P (4-port) 700~900 P (2-port):
6
The RU3952m is configured to work at a single frequency band (2.1 GHz) in 2T4R mode. It uses four DIN connectors (A/ B/C/D). Its configuration scheme is the same as the 2T4R module. The 1.8 GHz 2R channel of the RU3952m is not functional.
Antenna 1710~2170M Hz(UP), 2500~26900 MHz/ 690~960MHz (DOWN)
l The RU3952m is used to support inter-frequency mutual aid. Its maximum output power is 2x60 W and it works at 2100 MHz (UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz) in 2T4R mode. l It can work in UMTS mode. l It can provide the following wideband antennas for external RRUs or RFUs: 4-port 1.8 GHz antenna (the ports are provided by the 1.8/2.1 GHz external combiner in the lower slot), 4-port 2.6 GHz antenna (the ports are on the bottom of the antenna), and 2-port 700-900 MHz antenna (the ports are on the bottom of the antenna).
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
For carrier power specifications of the RU3952m, see technical specifications of the RRU3952m.
123
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quan tity
Configuration Principle
WD7MA AU39113
AAU3911, 2100 MHz 2T4R,2*60 W (UP) +1920~2170 MHz/ 1710~1880 MHz Combiner 4 path (DOWN); Antenna 1710~2690 MHz (UP), 690~960 MHz (DOWN)
2.1 G A 2T4R 2x60 W (RU3832)+1.8 P (four ports) +700~900 P (two ports):
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU.
l An RU3832 is used, which works in 2T4R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x60 W. l UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz
For carrier power specifications of the RU3832, see technical specifications of the RRU3832.
l It can work in UMTS mode. l It can provide a 4-port broadband antenna of 1800 MHz and a 2-port broadband antenna of 700 MHz or 900 MHz for external RRUs and RFUs.
Configurations of RF Module 1A Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz) The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at band 7 (2600 MHz).
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-52 Principles for configuring RF modules working at band 7 (2600 MHz) Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quan tity
Configuration Principle
WD7MA AU39111
AAU3911, 2600 MHz 2T4R, 2*40 W (UP); Antenna 2500~2690 MHz (UP), 1710~2170 MHz/690~960 MHz (DOWN)
2.6 A 2T4R 2x40 W (RU3260) +1.8~2.1 P (four ports) +700~900 P (two ports)
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU.
l An RU3260 is used, which works in 2T4R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x40 W. l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz
For carrier power specifications of the RU3260, see technical specifications of the RRU3260.
l It can work in LTE mode. l It can provide a 4-port antenna of 1800-2100 MHz and a 2-port wideband antenna of 700/900 MHz for external RRUs or RFUs.
Configurations of RF Module 1A Working at Band 4 (AWS) The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at band 4 (AWS).
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-53 Principles for configuring RF modules working at band 4 (AWS) Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quan tity
Configuration Principle
WD7MA AU39110
AAU3911, AWS 2T4R, 2*60 W (UP) +AWS/PCS Combiner 4 path (DOWN); Antenna 1710~2690 MHz (UP), 690~960 MHz (DOWN)
AWS A 2T4R 2x60 W (RU3832)+PCS P (4-port) +700~900 P (2-port):
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU.
l An RU3832 is used, which works in 2T4R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x60 W.
For carrier power specifications of the RU3832, see technical specifications of the RRU3832.
l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHz l It can work in UMTS, LTE, or UL mode. l It can provide a 4-port antenna of PCS and a 2port broadband antenna of 700 MHz or 900 MHz for external RRUs and RFUs.
WD7MA AU39114
AAU3911, AWS 2T4R, 2x60 W (DOWN); Antenna 2500~2690 MHz (UP), 1710~2170 MHz/690~960 MHz (DOWN)
AWS A 2T4R 2x60 W (RU3832)+700~900 P (2port): l An RU3832 is used, which works in 2T4R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x60 W. l UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHz
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU. For carrier power specifications of the RU3832, see technical specifications of the RRU3832.
l It can work in UMTS, LTE, or UL mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Configurations of RF Module 2A Table 4-54 Configurations of RF module 2A Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quan tity
Configuration Principle
WD7MA AU39112
AAU3911, 2600 MHz 2T4R, 2x40 W (UP) + AWS 2T4R, 2x60 W (DOWN); Antenna 2500~2690 MHz (UP), 1710~2170 MHz/ 690~960 MHz (DOWN)
2.6 A 2T4R 2x40 W (RU3260) +AWS A 2T4R 2x60 W (RU3832)+700~900 P (2port):
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU.
An RU3260 is used as a 2.6 A RF module: l An RU3260 is used, which works in 2T4R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x40 W. l UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHz l It can work in LTE mode. An RU3832 is used as an AWS A RF module:
For carrier power specifications of the RU3260, see technical specifications of the RRU3260. For carrier power specifications of the RU3832, see technical specifications of the RRU3832.
l An RU3832 is used, which works in 2T4R mode and provides the maximum output power of 2x60 W. UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHz l It can work in UMTS, LTE, or UL mode. l It can provide a 2-port broadband antenna of 700 MHz/900 MHz for external RRUs and RFUs.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quan tity
Configuration Principle
WD7MJT BK3000
AU3911, 2.1 GHz 2T4R', 2x60 W (UP) +1.8 GHz 2T4R', 2x60 W (DOWN); Antenna 1710 MHz to 2170 MHz (UP), 2500 MHz to 26900 MHz/ 690 MHz to 960 MHz (DOWN)
The RU3952m is used by 2.1 GHz to support interfrequency mutual aid. It provides the maximum output power of 2x60 W, works in 2.1 GHz 2T2R+1.8 GHz 2R mode, and uses only A/B ports.
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU.
The RU3952m is used by 1.8 GHz to support interfrequency mutual aid. It provides the maximum output power of 2x60 W, works in 1.8 GHz 2T2R+2.1 GHz 2R mode, and uses only A/B ports.
For carrier power specifications of the RU3952m, see technical specifications of the RRU3952m.
Working frequency bands: 2.1 GHz: UL 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL 2110 MHz to 2170 MHz 1.8 GHz: UL 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL 1805 MHz to 1880 MHz l 1.8 GHz supports the GSM, LTE, or GL mode. 2.1 GHz supports the UMTS mode. l It can provide the following wideband antennas for external RRUs or RFUs: 4-port 2.6 GHz antenna (the ports are on the bottom of the antenna), and 2-port 700 MHz to 900 MHz antenna (the ports are on the bottom of the antenna).
4.4.5 AAU3940 Configurations This section describes configuration principles and typical configurations of the AAU3940.
Principles for configuring an AAU3940 The AAU3940 configuration principles are as follows: Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
l
Each sector needs to be configured with an AAU3940. The number of RF modules is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l
The AAU3940 is an antenna with horizontal beamwidth of 70°, and therefore does not apply to an omni-directional site.
l
The AAU3940 only applies to sectorized cells. Each sector requires at most one AAU3940. The AAU3940 is applicable to a cell that is partitioned into a maximum of three sectors.
l
The AAU3940 does not support mechanical tilt but only supports electrical tilt. The horizontal angle of the AAU3940 is adjusted using mounting kits.
l
The AAU3940 only supports one AC input, which is applied in AC power supply scenarios. The DC power supply is not supported. The AAU3940 also supports 10 kA differential mode and 20 kA common mode with surge protection capabilities.
l
The AAU3940 can be used together with the BBU3900, BBU3910, or BBU3910A.
Configuration principle of CPRI ports l
The AAU3940 provides two CPRI ports, which support a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s, 2.5 Gbit/s, 4.9 Gbit/s, or 9.8 Gbit/s.
l
The AAU3940 supports dual-band and UL dual-mode. The dual-star, star, and chain topologies are used for CPRI connection.
l
In remote networking scenarios, the star topology for CPRI connection is recommended for a base station located on a rooftop. A cascading way is recommended for a base station located along the streets to reduce fiber optic cables.
l
Optical modules supporting a CPRI data of 9.8 Gbit/s are recommended.
Typical configurations of an AAU3940 The following table shows the configuration of carriers on the AAU3940. Table 4-55 Carrier specifications of AAU3940 Description
Function
Working Mode
Configuration Capacity
1.8 GHz (LTE) +2.1 GHz (LTE +UMTS)
1.8 GHz (UL: 1710~1785 MHz, DL: 1805~1880 MHz)+2.1 GHz (UL: 1920~1980 MHz, DL: 2110~2170 MHz)
UMTS only
Six 1T2R carriers or four 2T2R carriers
LTE only
2x20 MHz 2T2R
UL
Four UMTS 1T2R carriers and two LTE 20 MHz 2T2R carriers
The following table lists AAU3940 configuration.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-56 AAU3940 configuration Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD7MAA U39400
Function ModuleAAU3940WD7MIRTA7X0 C-FDD Multicarrier RF transceiver (2*2*20W TX: 1805-1880MHz,R X: 1710-1785MHz/ TX: 2110-2170MHz,R X: 1920-1980MHz, 10G, 220VAC, 14/14.5dBi,-3-12d eg RET)
1.8 G+2.1 G (2T2R):
6
Each sector is configured with one AAU.
l uses wideband module 2T2R. The maximum output power is 2x20 W. l TX: 1805-1880 MHz, RX: 1710-1785 MHz/TX: 2110-2170 MHz, RX: 1920-1980 MHz
For carrier power specifications of the AAU3940, see technical specifications of the AAU3940.
l It can work in UMTS mode.
4.5 Cabinet Upgrade The cabinet upgrade solution aims to replace components in a cabinet whose version is earlier than Ver.D with components designed for a Ver.D cabinet so that the restructured cabinet has the same capabilities of power supply, power distribution, and heat dissipation as a Ver.D cabinet. This solution facilitates the evolution to SingleRAN.
BTS3900 The following table lists the configuration of BTS3900 cabinet upgrade packages.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-57 BTS3900 cabinet upgrade packages External Model
Description
Function
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2B00A D4800
BTS3900 Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A to Ver.D, -48VDC)
This package is used to upgrade a BTS3900 (Ver.A) cabinet to a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet in -48 V DC scenarios.
2
l Optional.
This package is used to upgrade a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet to a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet in -48 V DC scenarios.
2
WD2B00B D4800
BTS3900 Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.B to Ver.D, -48VDC)
l When a BTS3900 (Ver.A) cabinet supplied with -48 V power is upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the BTS3900 cabinet upgrade, such as the DCDU and fans. l Optional. l When a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet supplied with -48 V power is upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the BTS3900 cabinet upgrade, such as the DCDU and fans.
BTS3900L The following table lists the configuration of BTS3900L cabinet upgrade packages. Table 4-58 BTS3900L cabinet upgrade packages External Model
Description
Function
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
WD2B0LBD 4800
BTS3900L Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.B to Ver.D, -48VDC)
This package is used to upgrade a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet to a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet in -48 V DC scenarios.
1
l Optional.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
l When a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet supplied with -48 V power is upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the BTS3900L cabinet upgrade, such as the DCDU and fans.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
BTS3900A The following table lists the configuration of BTS3900A cabinet upgrade packages. The battery cabinet for the original base station also needs to be upgraded. For details about the configuration of battery cabinet upgrade packages, see related APM30 configuration manuals. Table 4-59 BTS3900A (Ver.A) cabinet upgrade packages External Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quanti ty
Configuration Principle
WD2B220A 2D00
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A.1 to Ver.D, 220VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.A 301) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site.
2
l Optional.
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A.1 to Ver.D, 110VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.A 301) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site.
2
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A.1 to Ver.D, -48VDC, TMC11H, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.A 301) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site.
2
WD2B110A 2D00
WD2BA48A 2D00
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
l When an APM30 (Ver.A 301) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted. l Optional. l When an APM30 (Ver.A 301) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted. l Optional. l When an APM30 (Ver.A 301) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, and fans.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quanti ty
Configuration Principle
WD2B220A 2D02
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A.2 to Ver.D, 220VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.A 302) to an APM30 (Ver.D) in a 220 V AC BTS3900A.
2
l Optional.
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A.2 to Ver.D, 110VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.A 302) to an APM30 (Ver.D) in a 110 V AC BTS3900A.
2
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A.2 to Ver.D, -48VDC, TMC11H, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.A 302) to an APM30 (Ver.D) in a -48 V AC BTS3900A.
2
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.A to Ver.D, -48VDC)
This package is used to upgrade an RFC (Ver.A) to an RFC (Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site.
2
WD2B110A 2D02
WD2BA48A 2D02
WD2BR48A 2D00
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
l When an APM30 (Ver.A 302) at a 220 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted. l Optional. l When an APM30 (Ver.A 302) at a 110 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted. l Optional. l When an APM30 (Ver.A 30) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, and fans. l Optional. l When an RFC (Ver.A) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the RFC upgrade, such as the DCDU and fans.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-60 BTS3900A (Ver.B) cabinet upgrade packages External Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD2B220 B2D00
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.B to Ver.D, 220VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.B) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site.
2
l Optional.
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.B to Ver.D, 110VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.B) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site.
2
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.B to Ver.D, -48VDC, TMC11H, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.B) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site.
2
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.B to Ver.D, -48VDC)
This package is used to upgrade an RFC (Ver.B) to an RFC (Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site.
2
WD2B110 B2D00
WD2BN48 B2D00
WD2BR48 B2D00
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
l When an APM30 (Ver.B) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted. l Optional. l When an APM30 (Ver.B) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted. l Optional. l When an APM30 (Ver.B) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, and fans. l Optional. l When an RFC (Ver.B) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the RFC upgrade, such as the DCDU and fans.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-61 BTS3900A (Ver.C) cabinet upgrade packages External Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD2B220 C2D00
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.C to Ver.D, 220VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.C) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site.
2
l Optional.
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.C to Ver.D, 110VAC, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.C) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site.
2
APM30H Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.C to Ver.D, -48 V DC, TMC11H, BTS3900A)
This package is used to upgrade an APM30 (Ver.C) to an APM30 (Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site.
2
BTS3900A RFU Cabinet Upgrade Package (Ver.C to Ver.D, -48 V DC)
This package is used to upgrade an RFC (Ver.C) to an RFC (Ver.D) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site.
2
WD2B110 C2D00
WD2BC48 C2D00
WD2BR48 C2D00
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
l When an APM30 (Ver.C) at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted. l Optional. l When an APM30 (Ver.C) at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, fans, two PSUs, and one PMU. If more than two PSUs are required, extra PSUs must be quoted. l Optional. l When an APM30 (Ver.C) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the APM30 upgrade, such as the cabinet door, AC/ DC system, and fans. l Optional. l When an RFC (Ver.C) at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is configured for the cabinet. l The configured package includes all materials required during the RFC upgrade, such as the DCDU and fans.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
4.6 Power Module This section describes configuration principles for the power modules used by 3900 series base stations.
BTS3900 The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900. Table 4-62 Principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900 External Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Qua ntity
Configuration Principle
DCDU03B 00000
DC power distribution unit
A DCDU-03B provides three 12 A and six 20 A DC power outputs.
1
l Optional. l The DCDU-03B provides power for low-power RRUs. It cannot provide power for high-power RRUs, including RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3841, RRU3961, RRU3832, RRU3939, and RRU3839. l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A+3x12 A power outputs. l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
DCDU11B 00000
DC power distribution unit
DC power distribution box (DCDU-11B). It provides ten 25 A DC power inputs.
1
l Optional. l The DCDU-11B is required in a macro+distributed base station. l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output ports, among which six ports use big tool-less female connectors (pressfit type) and four ports use small tool-less female connectors (pressfit type). l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Qua ntity
Configuration Principle
TD1MDC DU12B0
DC power distribution unit
DC power distribution box (DCDU-12B). This module is used in DC cabinets and provides ten 30 A circuit breakers.
1
l Optional.
Power supply module, used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
1
Power supply module, used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
1
Power supply module, used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
3
Power module, used for converting +24 V DC power to -48 V DC power.
2
W0ACPSU 00
WPSU50A 01
WD2MR48 50G00
W0DCPSU 00
PSU Module (AC/DC), 30 A
PSU Module (AC/DC), 50 A
PSU module (AC/DC)
PSU Module (DC/DC)
l The DCDU-12B is required in a macro+distributed base station. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.B. l In AC power supply scenarios, the original power supply system contains two PSUs. When more than two PSUs are required, one or more PSU packages need to be configured. l Each package contains a PSU. l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.C. l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 2900 W. The number of PSUs to be configured depends on the total power consumption. l In AC input scenarios, the power system contains two PSUs by default and a maximum of one PSU can be added to each single cabinet. l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.D. l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 3000 W. The number of PSUs to be configured depends on the total power consumption. l In AC input scenarios, the power equipment houses two PSUs by default, and a maximum of three PSUs can be added to a cabinet. l It is optionally configured in Ver.B cabinets supplied with +24 V DC power. l In +24 V DC input scenarios, the power equipment houses two PSUs by default, and this module needs to be configured when more than two PSUs are required. A maximum of two PSUs can be added to a cabinet. l Each package contains one PSU.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Qua ntity
Configuration Principle
WD2M000 PEU03
-48 V Power and Environment Interface Unit
UPEUc, power module in the BBU, providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports.
2
l Optional.
UPEUd, power module in the BBU, providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports. It applies only to the BBU3910.
2
WD2M00P EIUD2
-48 V Power and Environment Interface Unit
l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.
l Optional. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.
BTS3900L The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900L.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-63 Principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900L External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
DCDU03 B00000
DC power distribution unit
A DCDU-03B provides three 12 A and six 20 A DC power outputs.
1
l Optional. l The DCDU-03B provides power for low-power RRUs. It cannot provide power for high-power RRUs, including RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3841, RRU3961, RRU3832, RRU3939, and RRU3839. l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A+3x12 A power outputs. l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
DCDU11 B00000
DC power distribution unit
DC power distribution box (DCDU-11B). It provides ten 25 A DC power inputs.
1
l Optional. l The DCDU-11B is required in a macro +distributed base station. l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output ports, among which six ports use big tool-less female connectors (pressfit type) and four ports use small tool-less female connectors (pressfit type). l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
TD1MD CDU12B 0
WD2MR 4850G00
DC power distribution unit
PSU module (AC/DC)
DC power distribution box (DCDU-12B). It provides ten 30 A circuit breakers.
1
Power supply module, used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
3
l Optional. l The DCDU-12B is required in a macro +distributed base station. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors). l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.D. l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 3000 W. The number of PSUs to be configured depends on the total power consumption. l In AC input scenarios, the power equipment houses two PSUs by default, and a maximum of three PSUs can be added to a cabinet.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD2M0 00PEU03
-48 V Power and Environmen t Interface Unit
UPEUc, power module in the BBU, providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports.
2
l Optional.
UPEUd, power module in the BBU, providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports. It applies only to the BBU3910.
2
WD2M0 0PEIUD2
-48 V Power and Environmen t Interface Unit
l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU. l Optional. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.
BTS3900A The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900A.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-64 Principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900A External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
DCDU03 B00000
DC power distribution unit
A DCDU-03B provides three 12 A and six 20 A DC power outputs.
1
l Optional. l The DCDU-03B provides power for low-power RRUs. It cannot provide power for high-power RRUs, including RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3841, RRU3961, RRU3832, RRU3939, and RRU3839. l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A+3x12 A power outputs. l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
DCDU11 B00000
DC power distribution unit
DC power distribution box (DCDU-11B). It provides ten 25 A DC power inputs.
1
l Optional. l The DCDU-11B is required in a macro +distributed base station. l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output ports, among which six ports use big tool-less female connectors (pressfit type) and four ports use small tool-less female connectors (pressfit type). l Each DCDU can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
TD1MD CDU12B 0
WD2ME 1PDU01 D
DC power distribution unit
Power Distribution Unit
DC power distribution box (DCDU-12B). It provides ten 30 A circuit breakers.
1
Power distribution box (PDU01D-01)
1
l Optional. l The DCDU-12B is required in a macro +distributed base station. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors). l Optional. l Each PDU01D-01 provides power for a maximum of six RRUs and needs to be used together with an ODM. l Each PDU01D-01 supports 1x100 A power.
WD2ME 2PDU03 D
Power Distribution Unit
Power distribution box (PDU03D-02)
3
l Optional. l Each PDU03D-02 provides power for three RRUs. l Each PDU03D-02 supports 3x30 A power.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
W0ACPS U00
PSU Module (AC/DC), 30 A
Power supply module, used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
A maximu m of one piece can be configur ed.
l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.B.
A maximu m of one piece can be configur ed.
l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.C.
A maximu m of three pieces can be configur ed.
l It is optionally configured in AC cabinets of Ver.D.
2
l Optional.
WPSU50 A01
WD2MR 4850G00
WD2M00 0PEU03
PSU Module (AC/DC), 50 A
PSU module (AC/DC)
-48 V Power and Environmen t Interface Unit
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Power supply module, used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
Power supply module, used for converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
UPEUc, power module in the BBU, providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports.
l In AC input scenarios, the power system contains two PSUs by default and a maximum of one PSU can be added to each single cabinet. l A PSU provides a power supply of 1600 W. The actual configuration quantity depends on the total power consumption of the equipment. One additional PSU is required at sites where a diesel generator is used.
l In AC input scenarios, the power system contains two PSUs by default and a maximum of one PSU can be added to each single cabinet. l A PSU provides a power supply of 2900 W. The actual quantity to be configured depends on the total power consumption of the equipment. One additional PSU is required at sites where a diesel generator is used.
l In AC input scenarios, the power equipment houses two PSUs by default, and a maximum of three PSUs can be added to a cabinet. l A PSU provides a power supply of 3000 W. The actual quantity to be configured depends on the total power consumption of the equipment. Each AC cabinet is configured with at least three PSUs (including the two PSUs in the original power system) at a site where a diesel generator is used.
l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD2M00 PEIUD2
-48 V Power and Environmen t Interface Unit
UPEUd, power module in the BBU, providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports. It applies only to the BBU3910.
2
l Optional. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.
BTS3900AL The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900AL. Table 4-65 Principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900AL External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD2P00 0PEU00
-48 V Power and Environmen t Interface Unit
UPEUc, power module in the BBU, providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports.
2
l Optional.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD2P00 PEUD00
-48 V Power and Environmen t Interface Unit
UPEUd, power module in the BBU, providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports and applies only to the BBU3910.
2
l Optional.
WD2MR 4850G00
PSU Module Power supply (AC/DC), 50 module, used for A converting AC power to -48 V DC power.
l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.
A maximu m of five pieces can be configur ed.
l Optional components in the AC cabinet l The power supply capacity of a PSU is 3000 W. The number of PSUs to be configured depends on the total power consumption. l In AC power supply scenarios, the original power supply system contains two PSUs, and a maximum of five PSUs can be added to a cabinet. l Each AC cabinet is configured with at least three PSUs (including the two PSUs in the original power system) at a site where a diesel generator is used.
DCDU12 BPAC00
DCDU12 BPDC00
DC Power Distribution Unit (AC Cabinet)
DC Power Distribution Unit (DC Cabinet)
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
DC power 2 distribution box (DCDU-12B). This module is used in an AC cabinet and provides ten 30 A circuit breakers.
l Optional.
DC power 2 distribution box (DCDU-12B). It is used in DC cabinets and provides ten 30 A circuit breakers.
l Optional.
l When a BTS3900AL AC cabinet is configured with DC RRUs, a DCDU-12B is required for every six DC RRUs. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
l When a BTS3900AL DC cabinet is configured with DC RRUs, a DCDU-12B is required for every six DC RRUs. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
DBS3900 The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the DBS3900. Table 4-66 Principles for configuring power modules in the DBS3900 External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
DCDU03 B00000
DC power distribution unit
DC power distribution box (DCDU-03B)
3
l Optional. l The DCDU-03B can be used if the site is not configured with RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3841, RRU3961, RRU3832, RRU3939, or RRU3839. l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A+3x12 A power outputs. l Each DCDU-11B can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
DCDU11 B00000
DC power distribution unit
DC power 3 distribution box (DCDU-11B). It provides ten 25 A DC power outputs. Each DCDU supports a maximum of six groups of power cables for DC RRUs.
l Optional. l The DCDU-11B can be used if the site is configured with RRU3829, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3841, RRU3961, RRU3832, RRU3939, or RRU3839. l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A power output ports, among which six ports use big tool-less female connectors (pressfit type) and four ports use small tool-less female connectors (pressfit type). l Each DCDU-11B can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU.
TD1MD CDU12B 0
WD5PM PW80000
DC power distribution unit
AC/DC RRU power module
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
DC power 3 distribution box (DCDU-12B). Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers.
l Optional.
AC/DC RRU power module
l Optional.
-
l Each DCDU-12B can provide power for a maximum of 6 DC RRUs. Two RRU3004 modules in the same sector are considered as one RRU. l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A circuit breakers (using six EPC5 connectors and four EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD5PA CDCPM0 0
AC/DC RRU power module
AC/DC power module for a blade RRU
-
l When an AC RRU consists of an RRU3824/ RRU3826/RRU3929/RRU3926/RRU3936/ RRU3838/RRU3832/RRU3260/RRU3268/ RRU3938/RRU3939 and an AC/DC module, this module must be quoted. Each AC RRU is configured with one of this module. l WD5PMPW80000 is replaced by WD5PACDCPM00.
WD2M00 0PEU03
WD2M00 PEIUD2
-48 V Power and Environmen t Interface Unit
-48 V Power and Environmen t Interface Unit
UPEUc, power module in the BBU, providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports.
2
UPEUd, power module in the BBU, providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports and applies only to BBU3910.
2
l Optional. l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU. l Optional. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.
BTS3900C The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900C.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-67 Principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900C External Model
Descriptio n
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD2P00 0PEU01
-48 V Power and Environmen t Interface Unit
UPEUc, power module in the BBU, providing 360 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports.
1
l Optional.
UPEUd, power module in the BBU, providing 650 W power for boards in a BBU. In addition, it provides eight external dry contact alarm ports and applies only to BBU3910.
1
WD2P00 PEUD01
-48 V Power and Environmen t Interface Unit
l One UPEUc is configured in a BBU3900 by default. One more UPEUc is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3900 is more than 360 W or the BBU3900 requires power backup of less than 360 W. l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU. l Optional. l One UPEUd is configured in a BBU3910 by default. One more UPEUd is required if the total power consumption of boards in the BBU3910 is more than 650 W or the BBU3910 requires power backup of less than 650 W. l The second UPEU occupies the same slot as the UEIU. If this UPEU is configured, the default UEIU cannot be configured for the BBU.
4.7 RET Module Configurations The following table lists the configurations of an RET module.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-68 Configurations of an RET module External Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
GM5M00G ATM00
Antenna and TMA Control Unit
RET antenna and TMA control module
2
This module is configured when DRFUs have been configured for GSM mode and a TMA or RET antenna is in use. When DRFUs are configured at a site and the TMA function is required, the GATM must be configured. Each GATM supplies power to six BiasTees. When DRFUs are configured at a site and the RET antenna is required, the GATM must be configured. Each GATM supplies power to three BiasTees.
GSM board
NOTE
In GSM mode, a common TMA cannot be used with an RET antenna, because the overcurrent of RET antenna adjustment will mistakenly cause a TMA alarm. GBSS12.0 supports a smart TMA which can be used with an RET antenna.
4.8 Hardware License Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for each type of base station.
4.8.1 Hardware License Configuration of GSM Base Stations This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for GSM base stations. The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for GSM base stations. Table 4-69 Hardware license configuration of GSM base stations External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
GMMS0DR FUT00
3900 series DRFU transceiver (per TRX)
License for the TRX of a DRFU in GSM mode
Each DRFU provides one TRX by default. One license is configured for each excess TRX.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
It applies to DRFUs.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
GMMS0GR FUT00
3900 series GRFU transceiver (per TRX)
License for providing multiple TRXs for a GRFU
Each GRFU provides one TRX by default. One license is configured for each excess TRX.
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
License for the second GSM TRX of a multimode RF module
Each multimode RF module provides one GSM TRX by default. To enable a multimode RF module to provide two GSM TRXs, the module needs to be configured with one license.
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
License for multiple GSM TRXs of a multimode RF module
WDMSMU LTIT00
WDMSMU LTIT01
It applies to GRFUs.
It applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs. When a multimode module is configured with more than two GSM TRXs, the number of licenses to be configured for the module is the total number of GSM TRXs configured for the module minus 2. This license applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs.
GMMS0DR RUT00
3900 series RRU3004 transceiver (per TRX)
RRU3004 dual transceiver license
Each RRU3004 supports one TRX by default. An RRU3004 that supports two carriers requires a doubletransceiver license.
GMMS0GR RUT00
3900 series RRU3008 transceiver (per TRX)
RRU3008 multiTRX license
Each RRU3008 supports one TRX by default. The number of multi-TRX licenses is one less than the number of TRXs supported by an RRU3008.
GMMSMC 60HP00
Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License (per TRX)
Each TRX of a multi-carrier module supports 60 W transmit power.
One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose transmit power is greater than or equal to 60 W and is smaller than 80 W.
Multi Carrier 80 W High Power License (per TRX)
Each TRX of a multi-carrier module supports 80 W transmit power.
One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose transmit power is greater than or equal to 80 W. This package does not contain the license package of Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License for Blade&AAU (per TRX).
GMMSMC 80HP00
For the RF module where the transmit power of each channel is greater than or equal to 60 W, the Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License is supported.
For the RF module where the transmit power of each channel is greater than or equal to 80 W, the Multi Carrier 80 W High Power License is supported.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
WDMSMU LTIT03
GSM Multiple Transceiver for the 2nd TRX of MultiMode Blade&AAU
License for the second GSM TRX of a multimode RF module (AAU or blade RRU)
Each multimode RF module provides one GSM TRX by default. To enable a multimode RF module to provide two GSM TRXs, the module needs to be configured with one license.
GSM Multiple Transceiver for MultiMode Blade&AAU
License for multiple GSM TRXs of a multimode RF module (AAU or blade RRU)
This license is configured when a multimode module is configured with more than two GSM TRXs. The number of licenses to be configured for the module equals the total number of GSM TRXs configured for the module minus 2.
WDMSMU LTIT02
This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU.
This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU. GMMSMC 60HP01
GMMSMC 80HP01
Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License for Blade&AAU (per TRX)
Each TRX of a multi-TRX module (AAU or blade RRU) supports 60 W transmit power.
One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose transmit power is greater than or equal to 60 W and is smaller than 80 W.
Multi Carrier 80 W High Power License for Blade&AAU (per TRX)
Each TRX of a multi-TRX module (AAU or blade RRU) supports 80 W transmit power.
One package is configured for each GSM carrier whose transmit power is greater than or equal to 80 W. This package does not contain the license package of Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License for Blade&AAU (per TRX).
This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU.
For the RF module where the transmit power of each channel is greater than or equal to 80 W, the Multi Carrier 80 W High Power License is supported. This license applies only to AAUs and blade RRUs.
4.8.2 Hardware License Configuration of UMTS Base Stations This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for UMTS base stations. The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for UMTS base stations.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-70 Hardware license configuration of UMTS base stations External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
QWMS000U CE01
UL CE License for 0 CEs to 64 CEs (per 16 CEs)
This license is configured for the UMTS mode. It is used for uplink CEs and quoted in a step-wise manner.
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured.
QWMS000U CE02
QWMS000U CE03
QWMS000U CE04
QWMS000D CE01
QWMS000D CE02
QWMS000D CE03
QWMS000D CE04
l It is configured when less than or equal to 64 CEs are required. l Four licenses are configured when more than 64 CEs are required.
UL CE License for 64 CEs to 128 CEs (per 16 CEs)
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured.
UL CE License for 128 CEs to 192 CEs (per 16 CEs)
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured.
UL CE License for more than 192 CEs (per 16 CEs)
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured.
DL CE License for 0 CEs to 64 CEs (per 16 CEs)
It is configured for the 65th to 128th CEs.
It is configured for the 129th to 192nd CEs.
It is configured when more than 192 CEs are required. This license is configured for the UMTS mode. It is used for downlink CEs and quoted in a step-wise manner.
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured. l It is configured when less than or equal to 64 CEs are required. l Four licenses are configured when more than 64 CEs are required.
DL CE License for 64 CEs to 128 CEs (per 16 CEs)
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured.
DL CE License for 128 CEs to 192 CEs (per 16 CEs)
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured.
DL CE License for more than 192 CEs (per 16 CEs)
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum four licenses can be configured.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
It is configured for the 65th to 128th CEs.
It is configured for the 129th to 192nd CEs.
It is configured when more than 192 CEs are required.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
QWMS0HDP AC00
HSDPA Code (per Code)
HSDPA code resources
This is a mandatory HSDPA function item. This item must be configured based on the quantity of the HSDPA code resources required by the base station. Each package is one HSDPA code. The minimum configuration is five HSDPA codes. For a base station, the maximum number of HSDPA codes that can be configured equals the number of cells carried by the base station multiplied by 15. The number of HSDPA codes required by a base station must be a multiple of 5.
QWMS000M CA00
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
Multi-carrier function for the UMTS mode
A license for one carrier is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. When the module has more than one carrier, one package needs to be configured for each excess carrier. It applies to the WRFU, WRFUd, and RRU in UMTS mode.
QWMS0000P A00
Power License (per 20 W)
License package for 20 W power
A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. When the power exceeds 20 W, one package needs to be configured for each excess part of 20 W power.
WDMS000M CA00
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
License for the first carrier of the UMTS mode in a multimode RF module
The quotation of a multimode RF module does not include a license for UMTS carriers. Therefore, one license is configured for the first UMTS carrier of each module.
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
License for multiple UMTS carriers of a multimode RF module
The quotation of a multimode RF module does not include a license for UMTS carriers. Therefore, one license is configured for each of the second to fourth UMTS carriers of each module.
UMTS NodeB Signaling Capacity License (per 50 CNBAP/ s)
UMTS signaling capacity license
It is configured when the signaling capacity of a base station exceeds 350 CNBAP/s. Each license contains a signaling capacity of 50 CNBAP/s.
Multi Carrier License for Blade&AAU (per Carrier)
Multi-carrier function for the UMTS mode of an AAU or blade RRU
WDMS000M CA01
QWMS00UN SC00
QWMS000M CA01
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
This license applies to multimode RF modules.
This license applies to multimode RF modules.
This license is supported from SRAN7.0/RAN14.0 onwards. A license for one carrier is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. When the module has more than one carrier, one package needs to be configured for each excess carrier. This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
QWMS0000P A01
Power License for Blade&AAU (per 20 W)
License package for 20 W power of an AAU or blade RRU
A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. When the power exceeds 20 W, one package needs to be configured for each excess part of 20 W power. This license applies to an AAU or a blade RRU.
WDMS000M CA03
WDMS000M CA02
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Blade&AAU (per Carrier)
License for the first UMTS carrier of a multimode RF module (AAU or blade RRU)
The license package for each UMTS carrier is not included in a multimode module, but configured for the first UMTS carrier of each multimode module. One license is required for each UMTS carrier.
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Blade&AAU (per Carrier)
License for multiple UMTS carriers of a multimode RF module (AAU or blade RRU)
The license package for each UMTS carrier is not included in a multimode module. It is configured for the second to fourth carriers for each multimode module. One license is required for each UMTS carrier.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
4.8.3 Hardware License Configuration of LTE Base Stations This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for LTE base stations. The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for LTE base stations. Table 4-71 Hardware license configuration of LTE base stations External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
LT1S0000P A00
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
Power license package for RF modules
A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. When the power exceeds 20 W, one package needs to be configured for each excess part of 20 W power.
LT1S000M CA00
LTE Multi Carrier (per Carrier)
Multi-carrier license package for RF modules
The quotation for each RF module includes one carrier by default. When more than one carrier is used by an RF module, one package is configured for every additional carrier. It applies to RF modules with multiple carriers.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
LT1S005M HZ00
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
Capacity Carrier Bandwidth licence (per cell) for RF modules
l When a cell uses less than or equal to 5 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell. l When a cell uses 10 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell. l When a cell uses 15MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell. l When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell. This license applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs.
LT1S010M HZ00
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
Carrier bandwidth l When a cell uses 10 MHz bandwidth, one license is licence (per cell) configured for the cell. for RF modules l When a cell uses 15 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell. l When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell. This license applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs.
LT1S015M HZ00
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz
Carrier bandwidth l When a cell uses 15 MHz bandwidth, one license is licence (per cell) configured for the cell. for RF modules l When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell.
LT1S020M HZ00
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
Carrier bandwidth When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is licence (per cell) configured for the cell. for RF modules
LT1S0ACT US00
RRC connected User
License for the baseband processing capacity of RRC_connected users (per RRC_connected user)
This package is configured based on the network plan. Each cell is configured with the licenses for a minimum of 6 RRC_connected users, and the number of RRC_connected users increases with a step of 6. A maximum of 5400 RRC_connected users are allowed.
License for the throughput capacity of the baseband processing module (per Mbit/ s)
This package is configured based on the network plan. Each cell is configured with a minimum of 5 Mbit/s, and the capacity increases with a step of 5 Mbit/s. The maximum capacity is 750 Mbit/s.
LT1S0THR OU00
Throughput Capacity
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
For example, a S1/1/1 base station is configured with a minimum of 18 (equal to 3x6) RRC_connected users.
For example, a S1/1/1 base station is configured with a minimum of 15 Mbit/s (equal to 3 x 5 Mbit/s).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
LT1S0000R B00
Resource Block
Resource Block (per RB)
Assume that N specifies the number of required packages per cell. The total number of packages equals N multiplied by the number of cells. N is determined by the cell bandwidth as follows: l 1.4 MHz: N is 6. l 3 MHz: N is 15. l 5 MHz: N is 25. l 10 MHz: N is 50. l 15 MHz: N is 75. l 20 MHz: N is 100. In multi-carrier scenarios, the number of required packages is calculated on a per-carrier basis. The total number of packages is the sum of the calculation results. This package applies only to the LBBPd.
LT1S00BBT C00
BB Transmit Channel
BB Transmit Channel (per Channel)
This package is configured when the LBBPd2 requires more than two transmit channels. The quotation for an LBBPd2 includes two transmit channels per cell. When the number of transmit channels exceeds 2, one package is required for each transmit channel added. The number of required packages is calculated using the following formula: Number of packages required for one LBBPd2 = Number of sectors with more than two transmit channels x (Number of transmit channels - 2) x Number of carriers This license only applies to the LBBPc, LBBPd2, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6.
LT1S00BBR C00
BB Receive Channel
BB Receive Channel (per Channel)
This package is configured when the LBBPd2 requires more than two receive channels. Each baseband board has been configured with two receive channels per cell. Therefore, one package is required for every receive channel added. The number of required packages is calculated using the following formula: Number of packages required for one LBBPd2 = Number of sectors with more than two receive channels x (Number of receive channels - 2) x Number of carriers This license only applies to the LBBPc, LBBPd2, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
LT1S00RFT C00
RF Transmit Channel
RF Transmit Channel(per Channel)
This package is required when the RF module has more than two RF receive channels. Each RF module has two RF transmit channels. When the number of RF transmit channels exceeds 2, one package is required for each added transmit channel. This package applies only to the RF modules with four transmit channels (4T RF modules). The number of licenses to be configured is calculated by the following formula: Number of licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs with more than two transmit channels x (Number of transmit channels of a single RRU - 2)
LT1S00RFR C00
RF Receive Channel
RF Receive Channel (per Channel)
This package is required when the RF module has more than two RF receive channels. Each RF module has two RF transmit channels. When the number of RF transmit channels exceeds 2, one package is required for each added transmit channel. This package applies only to the RF modules with four receive channels (4R RF modules). The number of licenses to be configured is calculated by the following formula: Number of licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs with more than two receive channels x (Number of receive channels of a single RRU - 2)
LT1S0000P A01
RF Output Power blade&AAU (per 20 W)
Power license package for an AAU or blade RRU
A license for 20 W power is included in the hardware quotation for each RF module of the base station. When the power exceeds 20 W, one package needs to be configured for each excess part of 20 W power. This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
LT1S000M CA01
RF multi carrier for blade&AAU (per carrier)
Multi-carrier license package for an AAU or blade RRU
The quotation for each RF module includes one carrier by default. When more than one carrier is used by an RF module, one package is configured for every additional carrier. This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
LT1S005M HZ01
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz for Blade&AAU
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Carrier bandwidth licence (per cell) for an AAU or blade RRU
When a cell uses 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz, or less than or equal to 5 MHz bandwidth, one license is configured for the cell. This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
LT1S010M HZ01
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz for Blade&AAU
Carrier bandwidth When a cell uses 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz bandwidth, licence (per cell) one license is configured for the cell. for an AAU or This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU. blade RRU
LT1S015M HZ01
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz for Blade&AAU
Carrier bandwidth When a cell uses 15 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth, one licence (per cell) license is configured for the cell. for an AAU or This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU. blade RRU
LT1S020M HZ01
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz for Blade&AAU
Carrier bandwidth When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one license is licence (per cell) configured for the cell. for an AAU or This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU. blade RRU
LT1S00RFT C01
RF Transmit Channel for blade&AAU
Blade&AAU RF Transmit Channel (per Channel)
This package is required when the RF module has more than two RF transmit channels. Each RF module has two RF transmit channels. When the number of RF transmit channels exceeds 2, one package is required for each added transmit channel. This package applies only to the RF modules with four transmit channels (4T RF modules). The number of licenses to be configured is calculated by the following formula: Number of licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs with more than two transmit channels x (Number of transmit channels of a single RRU - 2) This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
LT1S00RFR C01
RF Receive Channel for Blade&AAU
Blade&AAU RF Receive Channel (per Channel)
This package is required when the RF module has more than two RF transmit channels. Each RF module has two RF receive channels. When the number of RF receive channels exceeds 2, one package is required for each added receive channel. This package applies only to the RF modules with four receive channels (4R RF modules). The number of licenses to be configured is calculated by the following formula: Number of licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs with more than two receive channels x (Number of receive channels of a single RRU - 2) This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
NOTE
In MIMO scenarios, the power of each module is the product of the number of MIMO channels and the output power of each channel. For example: l 2x2 MIMO (2x30 W): Each RRU requires 60 W power and is configured with two RF channels. l 2x2 MIMO (2x40 W): Each RRU requires 80 W power and is configured with three RF channels. l 4x2 MIMO (4x40 W): Each RRU requires 80 W power and is configured with three RF channels. The BBU3900 supports hybrid configuration of the LBBPc, LBBPd1, LBBPd2, LBBPd3, UBBPd3, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6.
4.8.4 License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations This section describes the principles for configuring hardware licenses, co-MPT licenses, and co-BBP licenses for multimode base stations.
Hardware License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for multimode base stations. Table 4-72 Principles for configuring the hardware licenses for multimode base stations External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
WDMS00GU DM00
RF GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
Dual-mode license for GU RF modules
One package is configured for each sector served by a GU RF module.
WDMS00GL DM00
RF GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
Dual-mode license for GL RF modules
One package is configured for each sector served by a GL RF module.
WDMS00UL DM00
RF UMTS/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
Dual-mode license for UL RF modules
One package is configured for each sector served by a UL RF module.
WDMS00GU DM01
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license for Blade&AAU (per sector)
GU dual-mode license for an AAU or blade RRU
In GU dual mode, one package is configured for each sector.
GSM/LTE Dual Mode license for Blade&AAU (per sector)
GL dual-mode license for an AAU or blade RRU
In GL dual mode, one package is configured for each sector.
UMTS/LTE Dual Mode license for Blade&AAU (per sector)
UL dual-mode license for an AAU or blade RRU
For a UL dual-mode base station, one package is configured for each sector.
WDMS00GL DM01
WDMS00UL DM01
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a blade RRU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Co-MPT License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations The following table lists the principles for configuring the co-MPT licenses for multimode base stations. Table 4-73 Co-MPT license configuration of multimode base stations External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
WDMS0UM MG00
MPT Multi Mode license (GSM) (Per UMPT)
Co-MPT license for GSM
Configure this package based on the number of GSM base stations supported by each UMPT(1). Each base station can be configured with a maximum of one such license.
WDMS0UM MU00
MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS) (Per UMPT)
Co-MPT license for UMTS
Configure this package based on the number of UMTS base stations supported by each UMPT(1). Each base station can be configured with a maximum of one such license.
WDMS0UM ML00
MPT Multi Mode license (LTE FDD) (Per UMPT)
Co-MPT license for LTE
Configure this package based on the number of LTE base stations supported by each UMPT(1). Each base station can be configured with a maximum of one such license.
NOTE
(1) Each UMPT supports one mode by default. One license needs to be added for each additional mode. When multiple modes are configured for a UMPT, first quote a UMPT for the earliest mode and then add licenses for later modes. The GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes are arranged from the earliest to the latest as follows: GSM < UMTS < LTE
Co-BBP License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations The following table lists the configuration principles for co-BBP licenses of multimode base stations. Table 4-74 Configuration principles for co-BBP licenses of multimode base stations External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
WDMS00UFM G00
UBBP FirstMode license (GSM) (per UBBP)
License for the first mode (GSM) of the UBBP
One piece of the license is configured for each UBBP that uses GSM as its first mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
License Package Description
Function
Configuration Principle
WDMS00UMM G00
UBBP MultiMode license (GSM) (per UBBP)
License for adding a new mode (GSM) of the UBBP
One piece of this license is configured for each UBBP to which GSM is added as a new mode (either replacing the first mode or concurrent with the first mode).
WDMS00UFM U00
UBBP FirstMode license (UMTS) (per UBBP)
License for the first mode (UMTS) of the UBBP
One piece of the license is configured for each UBBP that uses UMTS as its first mode.
WDMS00UMM U00
UBBP MultiMode license (UMTS (per UBBP)
License for adding a new mode (UMTS) of the UBBP
One piece of this license is configured for each UBBP to which UMTS is added as a new mode (either replacing the first mode or concurrent with the first mode).
WDMS0UFML F00
UBBP FirstMode license (LTE FDD) (per UBBP)
License for the first mode (LTE FDD) of the UBBP
One piece of the license is configured for each UBBP that uses LTE FDD as its first mode.
WDMS0UMML F00
UBBP MultiMode license (LTE FDD) (per UBBP)
License for adding a new mode (LTE FDD) of the UBBP
One piece of this license is configured for each UBBP to which LTE FDD is added as a new mode (either replacing the first mode or concurrent with the first mode).
(1) In newly deployed single-mode sites, the license for the first mode (UBBP First-Mode license) must be quoted. (2) In newly deployed multimode sites, if licenses for multiple modes are purchased together, the license for a higher mode can be purchased with the license for a lower mode for free. The modes are arranged from the lowest to the highest as follows: GSM > UMTS > LTE FDD > LTE TDD. (3) In mode transition scenarios such as single mode to single mode, single mode to multimode concurrency, and multimode concurrency with new mode added, the UBBP Multi-Mode license corresponding to the newly added mode must be purchased.
4.9 Equipment and Product Auxiliary Material Configuration This section describes the principles for configuring the installation and site auxiliary materials.
4.9.1 Configurations of Auxiliary Materials for Installation This section describes the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials used for installing 3900 series base stations.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Transmission Cables/Packages The following table lists transmission cables and transmission packages for 3900 series base stations. Table 4-75 Auxiliary materials for 3900 series base station installation Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
QWMP0004 E100
Trunk Cable (75 Ohm, 4E1, 10m)
E1 cable
-
l It needs to be configured when 75 ohm E1 transmission or E1 line clock is used. l One package is configured for every four E1s.
QWMP0004 E101
Trunk Cable (120 Ohm, 4E1, 10m)
E1 cable
-
l It needs to be configured when 120 ohm E1 transmission or E1 line clock is used. l One package is configured for every four E1s.
QWMP0000 FE00
Ethernet Cable
FE/GE cable
-
l It needs to be configured when FE/GE electrical ports are used. l One piece is configured for every FE/GE.
LTIP000FB R00
Optical Fiber
FE/GE cable
-
l It needs to be configured when FE/GE optical ports are used. l One piece is configured for every FE/GE (only for Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets).
QWMP0000 FE02
QWMP0000 GE00
Optical Fiber(FE/ STM-1)
Optical Fiber(GE)
FE/STM-1 optical transmission package
-
GE optical transmission package
-
l It needs to be configured when FE/STM-1 optical ports are used. l One piece is configured for every FE/ STM-1 (only for Ver.D or Ver.E cabinets). l It needs to be configured when GE optical ports are used. l One piece is configured for every GE (only for Ver.D or Ver.E cabinets).
Jumper Packages The following table lists jumper packages for 3900 series base stations.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
QWMP000J MP00
Top Jumper Cable Unit for RFU
Fixed-length jumper on the top of the cabinet
-
l Each antenna is configured with one package when the base station is configured with RFUs.
Jumper package for common areas
-
QWMP000J MP02
Top Jumper Cable Unit for RRU
l The number of packages is determined by the number of antennas(1). l This package is used in common areas. Each antenna in a distributed base station is configured with one package. l The number of packages is determined by the number of antennas(1).
QWMP000J MP03
Top Jumper Cable Unit for RRU
Jumper package for cold areas
-
l This package is used in cold areas. Each antenna in a distributed base station is configured with one package. l The number of packages is determined by the number of antennas(1).
NOTE
(1) The number of antennas to be used in a 4-antenna receive diversity scenario is twice the number of antennas used in other scenarios.
Installation Packages for BBU Interconnection The following table lists installation packages for BBU interconnection in 3900 series base stations.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
WD5PUCIUI M00
UCIU Interconnecting Materials (Internal Cabinet)
Materials (including fiber optical cables and optical modules) required for UCIU interconnectio n in a 3900 series base station
1
This package is optional for a BTS3900L/ BTS3900AL. It is required when BBUs are interconnected by connecting UCIUs.
WD5PUCIUI M01
UCIU Interconnecting Materials (Internal Cabinet)
Materials (including fiber optical cables and optical modules) required for interconnectio n between UCIUs in different 3900 series base stations
1
This package is optional for a BTS3900/ BTS3900A/DBS3900. It is required when BBUs are interconnected by connecting UCIUs.
WD5PUMPT IN02
UMPT Interconnection Cable,2.0m
Cable of 2 m (6.56 ft) for UMPT interconnectio n in a 3900 series base station
1
This package is optional. It is required when BBUs are interconnected by connecting UMPTs. This package is used when two BBUs are installed in the same cabinet.
WD5PUMPT IN05
UMPT Interconnection Cable,5.0m
Cable of 5 m (16.40 ft) for connecting UMPTs in different cabinets in a 3900 series base station
1
This package is optional. It is required when BBUs are interconnected by connecting UMPTs. This package is used when the BBUs are installed in different cabinets.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
RRU Virtual Installation Material Packages The following table lists RRU virtual installation material packages. Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
Configuration Principle
QWMPRRUI NS01
RRU Installation Materials
RRU installation material package
-
l This package is optional. Different auxiliary material packages are selected for multimode and single-mode fiber optic cables.
QWMPRRUI NS04
RRU Installation Materials(Single Mode)
RRU installation material package (single-mode)
-
l This package applies to an RRU3004/ RRU3008/RU3801E/RRU3804/ RRU3806/RRU3808/RRU3201/ RRU3203/RRU3220/RRU3222. l Each RRU is configured with one package, which includes RRU power cables, RRU fiber optic cables, and CPRI optical modules.
QWMPRRUI NS02
RRU Installation Materials, B
RRU installation material package
-
QWMPRRUI NS05
RRU Installation Materials(Single Mode)
RRU installation material package (single-mode)
-
l This package is optional. It is used for multimode RRUs, and different auxiliary material packages are selected for multimode and single-mode fiber optic cables. l This package applies to an RRU3908/ RRU3928/RRU3929/RRU3828/ RRU3829/RRU3926 and is configured when RRUs use a 2.5 Gbit/s CPRI data rate. l Each RRU is configured with one package, which includes RRU power cables, RRU fiber optic cables, and CPRI optical modules.
QWMPRRUI NS03
RRU Installation Materials
RRU installation materials (including 4.9 Gbit/s optical modules)
-
l This package is optional. A maximum of 4.9 Gbit/s data rate is supported and different auxiliary material packages are selected for multimode and single-mode fiber optic cables. l Each RRU3240/RRU3942/RRU3841 is configured with one package. l For other RRUs, one package is configured for each RRU when a 4.9 Gbit/s CPRI data rate is used.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maxi mum Quant ity
QWMPRRUI NS06
RRU Installation Materials(Single Mode)
RRU installation material package (single-mode, 4.9 Gbit/s optical module)
-
Configuration Principle
RRU Power Cable Installation Packages The following table lists RRU power cable installation packages. Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
QW7PRRUC AP01
DBS3900,RRU Cable Package (<=50m)
RRU cable package (≤ 50 m [164.04 ft]) for a DBS3900
1
l This package is optional. Each DC RRU3936/RRU3824/RRU3826/ RRU3838/RRU3832/RRU3268/ RRU3260/RRU3938/RRU3939/RRU3839 is configured with one package, which includes DC RRU power cables and PGND cables. l This package applies to a BTS3900/ BTS3900L/BTS3900A/DBS3900.
QW7PRRUC AP00
QW7PAAUC AP01
RRU Cable Package (<=100)
RU Cable Package for AAU (<=100m)
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
RRU cable package (≤ 100 m [328.08 ft]) for a BTS3900AL
-
RU cable package (≤ 100 m [328.08 ft])
-
l This package is optional. Each RRU is configured with one package. l This package applies to a BTS3900AL.
This package is optional. Each RU is configured with one package, which includes DC RU power cables and PGND cables.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
RRU CPRI Installation Material Packages The CPRI optical transmission material packages apply to the RRU3936/RRU3824/RRU3826/ RRU3838/RRU3832/RRU3268/RRU3260/RRU3938/RRU3939/RRU3839 and RU3260/ RU3268/RU3832. l
The 2.5 Gbit/s or 4.9 Gbit/s CPRI installation material package is optionally configured according to the application scenario and port rate of an RRU/RU.
l
The multimode or single-mode material package is configured according to the type of the CPRI fiber optic cable.
The following table lists RRU CPRI installation material packages. Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD5P25CP RI02
DBS3900,CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (2.5G)
Multimode optical transmission material package for RRUs with a 2.5 Gbit/s CPRI data rate
-
l This package is optional. l When using a 2.5 Gbit/s data rate, each RRU CPRI port is configured with one package.
WD5P25CP RI01
BTS3900AL,CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (2.5G) (Single Mode)
Single-mode optical transmission material package for RRUs with a 2.5 Gbit/s CPRI data rate
-
This package applies to a BTS3900/ BTS3900L/BTS3900A/BTS3900AL/ DBS3900.
WD5P49CP RI02
DBS3900,CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (4.9G)
Multimode optical transmission material package for RRUs with a 4.9 Gbit/s CPRI data rate
-
l This package is optional.
Single-mode optical transmission material package for RRUs with a 4.9 Gbit/s CPRI data rate
-
WD5P49CP RI01
BTS3900AL,CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (4.9G) (Single Mode)
l When using a 4.9 Gbit/s data rate, each RRU CPRI port is configured with one package. This package applies to a BTS3900/ BTS3900L/BTS3900A/BTS3900AL/ DBS3900.
Auxiliary Material Packages for AAU3902 Installation The following table lists the auxiliary material packages for AAU3902 installation.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
QW7PAA UCAP00
AAU Power Cable Package (<=100m)
RU cable package (≤ 100 m [328.08 ft])
-
One package is configured for each AAU3902.
WD5P49C PRI02
DBS3900,CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (4.9G)
CPRI multimode optical transmission materials (4.9 Gbit/s)
-
BTS3900AL,CPR I Optical Transmission Materials (4.9G) (Single Mode)
CPRI singlemode optical transmission materials (4.9 Gbit/s)
-
WD5P49C PRI01
The package includes AAU3902 power cables and PGND cables. When using multimode fiber optic cables and optical modules, each AAU3902 is configured with one package. The package includes one fiber optic cable and two optical modules, which support a maximum rate of 4.9 Gbit/s. When using single-mode fiber optic cables and optical modules, each AAU3902 is configured with one package. The package includes one fiber optic cable and two optical modules, which support a maximum rate of 4.9 Gbit/s.
Materials for an APM30 (Ver.D) to Be Configured with 15 RRUs Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
QWMPOD MINS00
ODM Installation Materials
The outdoor -48 V power distribution box (ODM) is used to distribute power to RRUs.
1
l One package is configured for an outdoor DBS3900 site that uses APM30 (Ver.D) cabinets and is configured with more than 12 RRUs.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
l Each package includes one ODM, one mounting kit, and auxiliary installation materials. l If 15 RRUs are configured, the maximum power configuration is as follows: 12 RRUs (2x60 W)+3 RRUs (2x40 W).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
QWMPOF DOFM00
OFD and Optical Fiber(Multimode)
Outdoor fiber distribution box (OFD) and 12-core multimode fiber optic cable, which support interconnectio n of CPRI fiber optic cables.
1
l One package is configured for an outdoor DBS3900 site that uses APM30 (Ver.D) cabinets and is configured with more than 21 fiber optic cables for RRUs.
OFD and 12core singlemore fiber optic cable, which support interconnectio n of CPRI fiber optic cables.
1
QWMPOF DOFS00
OFD and Optical Fiber(Single mode)
l Each package includes one OFD and one 12core multimode fiber optic cable. l It is configured when multimode fiber optic cables are used for CPRI ports.
l One package is configured for an outdoor DBS3900 site that uses APM30 (Ver.D) cabinets and is configured with more than 21 fiber optic cables for RRUs. l Each package includes one OFD and one 12core single-mode fiber optic cable. l It is configured when single-mode fiber optic cables are used for CPRI ports.
Site Installation Material Packages The following table lists the material packages for site installation. Table 4-76 Material packages for macro base station installation Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD5P0INS MT00
Installation Materials for BTS3900 Ver.B
Installation materials
1
l This package is optional. It is a site installation material package used for BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinets. l Each site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
QWMP0IN SMT06
Installation Materials for BTS3900 Ver.C
Installation materials
1
l This package is optional. It is a site installation material package used for BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinets. l Each site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
QWMP0IN SMT20
Installation Materials for BTS3900 Ver.D
Installation materials
2
l This package is optional. It is a site installation material package used for BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets. l One package is configured for each site configured with a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet. It includes the base, auxiliary cable, and low-value installation material.
QWMP0IN SMT24
QWMP0IN SMT05
Installation Materials for BTS3900 (Ver.D, 220V)
Installation materials
Installation Materials for BTS3900L Ver.B
Installation materials
2
l This package is optional. It is a site installation material package used for BTS3900 (Ver.D) 220 V AC cabinets. l Each BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet supplied with 220 V AC power is configured with one package. The package includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
1
l This package is optional. It is a site installation material package used for BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinets. l Each site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
QWMP0IN SMT07
Installation Materials for BTS3900L Ver.C
Installation materials
1
l Optional. It is a site installation material package used for BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets. l Each site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
QWMP0IN SMT21
Installation Materials for BTS3900L Ver.D
Installation materials
1
l This package is optional. It is a site installation material package used for BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets. l Each site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
QWMP0IN SMT24
Installation Materials for BTS3900L (Ver.D, 220V)
Installation materials
1
l This package is optional. It is a site installation material package used for BTS3900L (Ver.D) 220 V AC cabinets.
Installation Materials for BTS3900A Ver.B
Installation materials
Installation Materials for BTS3900A Ver.C
Installation materials
Installation Materials for BTS3900A (Ver.D, -48VDC)
Installation material package for a BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinet supplied with -48 V DC power
1
Installation Materials for BTS3900A (Ver.D, 220V/ 110VAC)
Installation material package for a BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinet supplied with 220/110 V AC power
1
WD5P0INS MT01
QWMP0IN SMT08
QWMP0IN SMT22
QWMP0IN SMT23
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
l Each BTS3900L (Ver.D) AC cabinet is configured with one package. The package includes the base, auxiliary cables, and lowvalue installation materials. 1
l Optional. It is configured for the BTS3900A (Ver.B) cabinet. l Each site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
1
l Optional. It is configured for the BTS3900A (Ver.C) cabinet. l Each site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials. l This package is optional. It is a site installation material package used for BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets. l Each site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
QWMP0IN SMT26
Installation Materials for BTS3900A (Ver.E, -48 V DC)
BTS3900A installation material package (Ver.E, -48 V DC)
2
l Optional. It is configured for a BTS3900A (Ver.E) cabinet supplied with -48 V DC power.
Installation Materials for BTS3900A (Ver.E, 220 V DC/110 V AC)
BTS3900A installation material package (Ver.E, 220 V AC/110 V AC)
2
Installation Materials for BTS3900AL
Installation materials
1
QWMP0IN SMT27
WD5P0INS MT09
l Each cabinet must be configured with one package, which includes the base, cables, and low-value installation auxiliary materials. l Optional. It is configured for a BTS3900A (Ver.E) cabinet supplied with 220 V DC or 110 V AC power. l Each cabinet must be configured with one package, which includes the base, cables, and low-value installation auxiliary materials. l This package is optional. It is a site installation material package used for BTS3900AL cabinets. l Each site must be configured with one package, which includes the base, auxiliary cables, and low-value installation materials.
QWMP0IN SMT03
Installation Materials for DBS3900
Installation materials
1
Each macro+distributed site must be configured with one package, which includes auxiliary cables and low-value installation materials.
Table 4-77 Material Packages for DBS3900 Installation Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD5P0INS MT03
Installation Materials for DBS3900
Installation materials
1
Each distributed site must be configured with one package. The package includes the auxiliary cables and low-value installation materials.
QWMP0INS MT13
OMB Cabinet Installation Materials (Ver.C, DC)
Installation materials for an OMB DC cabinet
1
This package is optional for the OMB (Ver.C) DC cabinet. Each OMB (Ver.C) DC cabinet is configured with one package.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
QWMP0INS MT09
OMB Cabinet Installation Materials (Ver.C, AC)
Installation materials for an OMB AC cabinet
1
This package is optional for the OMB (Ver.C) AC cabinet. Each OMB (Ver.C) AC cabinet is configured with one package.
Table 4-78 Auxiliary Material Packages for BTS3900C Installation Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
QWMP0004 E100
Trunk Cable (75 Ohm, 4E1, 10m)
E1 cable
-
It needs to be configured when 75 ohm E1 transmission or E1 line clock is used. One package is configured for every four E1s.
QWMP0004 E101
Trunk Cable (120 Ohm, 4E1, 10m)
E1 cable
-
It needs to be configured when 120 ohm E1 transmission or E1 line clock is used. One package is configured for every four E1s.
QWMP0000 FE00
Ethernet Cable
FE/GE cable
-
One package is configured for each FE/GE electrical port.
QWMP0000 FE02
Optical Fiber (FE/ STM-1)
FE/STM-1 optical transmission package
-
One package is configured for each FE/ STM-1 optical port when the FE/STM-1 optical port is used. FE/STM-1 optical fibers work with only BTS3900C (Ver.D) cabinets.
QWMP0000 GE00
Optical Fiber(GE)
GE optical transmission package
-
One package is configured for each GE optical port when the GE optical port is used. GE optical fibers work with only BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinets.
QWMP000J MP02
Top Jumper Cable Unit for RRU
Jumper package for common areas
-
Jumper package used for distributed base stations in common areas. Each antenna is configured with one package. Note: The number of antennas to be used in a 4-antenna receive diversity or RRU backup scenario is twice the number of antennas used in other scenarios.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Model
Description
Function
Maxim um Quantit y
Configuration Principle
QWMP000J MP03
Top Jumper Cable Unit for RRU
Jumper package for cold areas
-
This package is used in cold areas. Each antenna in a distributed base station is configured with one package. Note: The number of antennas to be used in a 4-antenna receive diversity or RRU backup scenario is twice the number of antennas used in other scenarios.
WD5P25CPR I0C
CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (2.5G)
CPRI optical transmission materials (2.5 Gbit/s)
-
Optional, multimode optical transmission material package (CPRI 2.5 Gbit/s) for the RRU One package is configured for each 2.5 Gbit/s CPRI port.
WD5P49CPR I0C
CPRI Optical Transmission Materials (4.9G)
CPRI optical transmission materials (4.9 Gbit/s)
-
Optional, multimode optical transmission material package (CPRI 4.9 Gbit/s) for the RRU One package is configured for each 4.9 Gbit/s CPRI port.
QWMP0INS MT0C
Installation Materials for BTS3900C AC Cabinet
Installation material package for a BTS3900C AC cabinet
1
Optional. Site installation material package for the BTS3900C AC cabinet. One package is configured for each BTS3900C AC cabinet.
QWMP0INS MT1C
Installation Materials for BTS3900C DC Cabinet
Installation material package for a BTS3900C DC cabinet
1
Optional. Site installation material package for the BTS3900C DC cabinet. One package is configured for each BTS3900C DC cabinet.
4.9.2 Auxiliary Materials on the Site This section describes the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on the sites of 3900 series base stations.
BTS3900 or BTS3900L The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900 or BTS3900L site.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
Table 4-79 Principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900 or BTS3900L site External Model
Description
Maxim um Quanti ty
Configuration Principle
A000GPS04
GPS Antenna/Feeder Package
1
One package is configured when a GPS antenna is required.
GM1X00IDDF 01
Embedded DDF Box (75 Ohm, 8 E1s)
-
l If the 75 ohm DDF needs to be provided by Huawei, it is recommended that each indoor site be configured with one piece. l Each package supports 8 E1s.
GM1X00IDDF 02
Embedded DDF Box (120 Ohm, 8 E1s)
-
l If the 120 ohm DDF needs to be provided by Huawei, it is recommended that each indoor site be configured with one piece. l Each package supports 8 E1s.
QW7PRRUCE P02
RRU Cable Extension Package (50 m to 100 m)
-
Optional. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 50 m and is shorter than 100 m. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package.
QW7PRRUCE P03
RRU Cable Extension Package (100 m to 150 m)
-
Optional. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 100 m and is shorter than 150 m. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package.
E000ICL00
Indoor Cable Ladder (2.5 m)
-
This package is configured for site deployment according to the actual requirement.
WDCDBOX01
Outdoor Cable Ladder (2.5 m)
-
It is configured according to the actual needs.
EFEDWID01
Thru-Wall Encapsulated Wiring Window
E000IGU00
Grounding Unit
l It is configured according to the actual needs. l A maximum of one package can be configured for each site. 2
l Each indoor site is configured with one ground bar. When the antenna is provided by Huawei, each site is configured with two ground bars. l Optional. One package is optionally configured for a newly deployed outdoor site according to the actual requirements.
GM1E00IEMU 01
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
1
One piece is configured for an indoor site where there are 17 to 32 Boolean alarm inputs.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Maxim um Quanti ty
Configuration Principle
QW7MEMUKI T01
Environment Monitoring Unit (with sensors)
1
l One piece is configured if the environment (such as the liquid level, smoke, door status, temperature, and humidity) of the equipment room needs to be monitored. l Additionally, 32 Boolean inputs are supported. l GM1E00IEMU01 is not required when this package is configured.
GM1X0DNSP E01
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
WD2M00EEU M01
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
AANTIFLTER 01
Anti-Interference Filter, Dual_band pass, RX: 824 to 849 MHz, TX: 869 to 894 MHz, 851 to 856 MHz, 856 to 860 MHz, 898.5 to 915 MHz, 0.9 (824 to 846.5 MHz), 1.2 dB(846.5 to 848 MHz), 1.9 dB(848 to 849 MHz), 0.9 dB (869 to 891.5 MHz), 1.2 dB (891.5 to 894 MHz), 54 dB, double, DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
AANTIFLTER 02
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 880 to 905 MHz, TX: 925 to 950 MHz, 869 to 878.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Optional, UK-specific. 17 to 32 Boolean inputs are required at a site. The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 850 MHz frequency. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference from the 800 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 880-905 MHz TX: 925-950 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
AANTIFLTER 03
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 885 to 910 MHz, TX: 930 to 955 MHz, 869 to 883.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 885-910 MHz TX: 930-955 MHz.
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 890 to 915 MHz, TX: 935 to 960 MHz, 869 to 888.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895.8-915 MHz TX: 940-960 MHz.
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940 to 960 MHz, 869 to 894 MHz, RX: 1.7 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895.8-915 MHz TX: 940-960 MHz.
TMA (NoAISG) Auxiliary Materials Kit (Not including TMA), GU
l Auxiliary installation material package for an antiinterference filter. One package is configured for a filter.
AANTIFLTER 04
AANTIFLTER 05
ATMAKIT00
Maxim um Quanti ty
Configuration Principle
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
-
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
l If the filter is provided by the customer or purchased locally, this item must be manually removed from the quotation list.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
BTS3900A or BTS3900AL The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials for a BTS3900A or BTS3900AL site. Table 4-80 Principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900A, BTS3900AL site External Model
Description
Maximu m Quantit y
Configuration Principle
A000GPS04
GPS Antenna/Feeder Package
1
One package is configured when a GPS antenna is required.
QW7P00EDDF0 0
Embedded DDF Box (75 Ohm, 8 E1s)
1
Optional. One package is configured for a new outdoor macro base station.
E00EDDF02
Embedded DDF Box (120 Ohm, 8 E1s)
1
Optional. One package is configured for a new outdoor macro base station.
QW7PRRUCEP 02
RRU Cable Extension Package (50 m to 100 m)
-
Optional. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 50 m and shorter than 100 m. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package.
QW7PRRUCEP 03
RRU Cable Extension Package (100 m to 150 m)
-
Optional. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 100 m and shorter than 150 m. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package.
WDCDBOX01
Outdoor Cable Ladder (2.5 m)
1
Optional. It is configured according to the requirements for a newly deployed base station.
E000IGU00
Grounding Unit
1
Optional. One package is optionally configured for a newly deployed outdoor site according to the actual requirements.
GM5X00SLPU0 0
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit (1-16 Boolean Alarm)
1
It is configured for an outdoor macro base station that needs to collect 1 to 16 Boolean alarm inputs.
WD2M00EEU M00
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
Optional. Configured in an outdoor macro base station when 17 to 32 Boolean alarms are required.
GM1X0DNSPE 00
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
GM1X0DNSPE 01
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
WD2M00EEU M01
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.
Optional, UK-specific. 17 to 32 Boolean inputs are required at a site. The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Maximu m Quantit y
Configuration Principle
WD2K000EIK0 1
Outdoor Adjusted Plinth (Width 600 mm)
-
Outdoor Adjusted Plinth (OAP600) for a cabinet used by the BTS3900A, which is optional. The OAP600 is configured in outdoor scenarios with rails. The distance between rails can be adjusted from 535 mm to 750 mm. By default, one OAP600 is configured for each RFC, either a stacked cabinet or a standalone RFC.
WD2K000EIK0 2
Outdoor Adjusted Plinth (Width 800 mm)
-
Optional. OAP800, used for installing a BTS3900AL cabinet on outdoor steel rails. l The OAP800's width ranges from 480 mm to 780 mm. Its depth ranges from 500 mm to 750 mm. l Each BTS3900AL is delivered with one OAP800 by default.
AANTIFLTER0 1
AANTIFLTER0 2
Anti-Interference Filter, Dual_band pass, RX: 824 to 849 MHz, TX: 869 to 894 MHz, 851 to 856 MHz, 856 to 860 MHz, 898.5 to 915 MHz, 0.9 (824 to 846.5 MHz), 1.2 dB (846.5 to 848 MHz), 1.9 dB (848 to 849 MHz), 0.9 dB (869 to 891.5 MHz), 1.2 dB (891.5 to 894 MHz), 54 dB, double, DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 880 to 905 MHz, TX: 925 to 950 MHz, 869 to 878.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 850 MHz frequency. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference from the 800 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 880-905 MHz TX: 925-950 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Maximu m Quantit y
Configuration Principle
AANTIFLTER0 3
Anti-Interference Filter,dual_band pass filter,RX: 885-910MHz;TX: 930-955MHz, 869-883.5MHz,RX: 2.1dB;TX:0.4dB, 40dB.,double unit,7/16 DIN female,Outdoor,DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 885-910 MHz TX: 930-955 MHz.
AANTIFLTER0 4
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 890 to 915 MHz, TX: 935 to 960 MHz, 869 to 888.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895.8-915 MHz TX: 940-960 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
AANTIFLTER0 5
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940 to 960 MHz, 869 to 894 MHz, RX: 1.7 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895.8-915 MHz TX: 940-960 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
ATMAKIT00
TMA (No AISG) Auxiliary Materials Kit (Not including TMA), GU
-
l Auxiliary installation material package for an anti-interference filter. One package is configured for a filter. l If the filter is provided by the customer or purchased locally, this item must be manually removed from the quotation list.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
DBS3900 The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a DBS3900 site. Table 4-81 Principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a DBS3900 site External Model
Description
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
A000GPS04
GPS Antenna/Feeder Package
1
One package is configured when a GPS antenna is required.
QW7P00EDDF0 0
Embedded DDF Box (75 Ohm, 8 E1s)
1
Optional. One package is configured for each newly deployed distributed base station.
E00EDDF02
Embedded DDF Box (120 Ohm, 8 E1s)
1
Optional. One package is configured for each newly deployed distributed base station.
E000IGU00
Grounding Unit
2
l Each indoor site is configured with one ground bar. When the antenna is provided by Huawei, each site is configured with two ground bars. l Each site is configured with one or two pieces if needed.
QW7PRRUCEP0 2
RRU Cable Extension Package (50 m to 100 m)
-
Optional. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 50 m and shorter than 100 m. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package.
QW7PRRUCEP0 3
RRU Cable Extension Package (100 m to 150 m)
-
Optional. The package is configured when the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than 100 m and shorter than 150 m. Each RRU that meets the condition is configured with one package.
E000ICL00
Indoor Cable Ladder (2.5 m)
-
Optional. The package is configured as required if the BBU is installed indoors in a new distributed base station.
WDCDBOX01
Outdoor Cable Ladder (2.5 m)
-
Optional. It is configured according to the requirements for a new distributed base station.
GM5X00SLPU0 0
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit (1-16 Boolean Alarm)
1
It is optionally configured for a distributed base station when the BBU is installed outdoors and there are 1 to 16 Boolean alarm inputs.
WD2M00EEUM 00
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
It is optionally configured when the BBU is installed outdoors in a distributed base station and 17 to 32 Boolean inputs need be monitored. It is also optional configured when 1 to 16 Boolean inputs need be monitored for a +24 V distributed base station. The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
External Model
Description
Maximu m Quantity
GM1X0DNSPE0 0
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
QW7MEEMUKI T0
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit (with sensors)
1
QW1XEMEUW S00
Environment Monitoring Unit (with sensors)
1
GM1X0DNSPE0 1
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
WD2M00EEUM 01
Embedded Environment Monitoring Unit
1
AANTIFLTER0 1
Anti-Interference Filter, Dual_band pass, RX: 824 to 849 MHz, TX: 869 to 894 MHz, 851 to 856 MHz, 856 to 860 MHz, 898.5 to 915 MHz, 0.9 (824 to 846.5 MHz), 1.2 dB (846.5 to 848 MHz), 1.9 dB (848 to 849 MHz), 0.9 dB (869 to 891.5 MHz), 1.2 dB (891.5 to 894 MHz), 54 dB, double, DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
4 Product Configuration
Configuration Principle
Optional. Configured when the BBU is installed indoors and the environment (such as the liquid level, smoke, door status, and temperature and humidity) in the equipment room needs to be monitored. It can support 32 Boolean alarm inputs. The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later. Optional, UK-specific. 17 to 32 Boolean inputs are required at a site. The EMUA will be replaced with the EMUB later.
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 850 MHz frequency. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference from the 800 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
AANTIFLTER0 2
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 880 to 905 MHz, TX: 925 to 950 MHz, 869 to 878.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 880-905 MHz TX: 925-950 MHz.
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 885 to 910 MHz, TX: 930 to 955 MHz, 869 to 883.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
-
AANTIFLTER0 3
AANTIFLTER0 4
AANTIFLTER0 5
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 890 to 915 MHz, TX: 935 to 960 MHz, 869 to 888.5 MHz, RX: 2.1 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass Anti-Interference Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 895.8 to 915 MHz, TX: 940 to 960 MHz, 869 to 894 MHz, RX: 1.7 dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40 dB, double unit, 7/16 DIN female, Outdoor, DC Pass
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 885-910 MHz TX: 930-955 MHz.
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895.8-915 MHz TX: 940-960 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters. -
l This filter applies only to a base station working at the 900 MHz frequency. It is used when the carriers of a base station are configured as follows: RX: 895.8-915 MHz TX: 940-960 MHz. l It is used only when the field RNP personnel find interference of CDMA, GSM or UMTS signals from the 850 MHz iDEN band. l It is a dual-unit filter. Each set of antenna is configured with one such filter, and a sector with four antennas is configured with two such filters.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
4 Product Configuration
External Model
Description
Maximu m Quantity
Configuration Principle
ATMAKIT00
TMA (No AISG) Auxiliary Materials Kit (Not including TMA), GU
-
l Auxiliary installation material package for an antiinterference filter. One package is configured for a filter. l If the filter is provided by the customer or purchased locally, this item must be manually removed from the quotation list.
BTS3900C The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900C site. Table 4-82 Auxiliary materials on a BTS3900C site External Model
Description
Maximum Quantity
Configuration Principle
E000IGU00
Grounding Unit
1
Optional. One package is optionally configured for a newly deployed outdoor site according to the actual requirements.
A000GPS04
GPS Antenna/ Feeder Package
1
One package is configured when a GPS antenna is required.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
This section describes the typical configuration scenarios and capacity expansion scenarios of 3900 series base stations. 5.1 Typical Configurations 5.2 Capacity Expansion Principles
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
5.1 Typical Configurations This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station in various application scenarios.
5.1.1 GSM Mode This section describes the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in GSM mode using RFUs or RRUs.
Typical Configurations of GSM Base Stations (with RFUs) Table 5-1 and Table 5-2 list the typical configurations of 3900 series macro base stations in GSM mode and using DRFUs or GRFUs. NOTE
DRFUs are not configured in a BTS3900AL cabinet.
Table 5-1 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using DRFUs Product Configuration
S1/1/1 (Without a Combiner )
S2/2/2 (Withou ta Combin er)
S3/3/3 (With a Combiner)
S4/4/4 (With a Combine r)
S4/4/4 (Withou ta Combin er)
S6/6/6 (With a Combine r)
S8/8/8 (With a Combin er)
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DRFU
3
3
5
6
6
9
12
3900 Series DRFU Transceiver (per TRX) License
0
3
4
6
6
9
12
Antenna
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Table 5-2 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using GRFUs Product Configuration
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S6/6/6
S8/8/8
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
GRFU
3
3
3
3
3
6
3900 Series GRFU Transceiver (per TRX) License
0
3
6
9
15
18
Antenna
3
3
3
3
3
3
Typical Configurations of GSM Base Stations (with RRUs) Table 5-3 and Table 5-4 list the typical configurations of the DBS3900 in GSM mode and using the RRU3004 or RRU3008. Table 5-3 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using the RRU3004 Product Configuration
S1/1/1 (With out a Comb iner)
S2/2/2 (With out a Comb iner)
S3/3/ 3 (Wit ha Com biner )
S4/4 /4 (Wit ha Co mbi ner)
S4/4/4 (With out a Com biner )
S6/6/6 (With a Combiner)
S8/8/8 (With a Combiner)
Cabinet (optional)
1
1
1
1
1
l APM30H (Ver.B): 2
l APM30H (Ver.B): 2
l APM30H (Ver.D): 1
l APM30H (Ver.D): 1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RRU3004
3
3
6
6
6
9
12
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Product Configuration
S1/1/1 (With out a Comb iner)
S2/2/2 (With out a Comb iner)
S3/3/ 3 (Wit ha Com biner )
S4/4 /4 (Wit ha Co mbi ner)
S4/4/4 (With out a Com biner )
S6/6/6 (With a Combiner)
S8/8/8 (With a Combiner)
3900 series RRU3004 transceiver (per TRX)
0
3
4
6
6
9
12
Antenna
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
Table 5-4 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using the RRU3008 Product Configuration
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S6/6/6
S8/8/8
Cabinet (optional)
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
RRU3008
3
3
3
3
3
6
3900 series RRU3008 transceiver (per TRX)
0
3
6
9
15
18
Antenna
3
3
3
3
3
3
5.1.2 UMTS Mode This section describes the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in UMTS mode using RFUs or RRUs. NOTE
l In non-MIMO configurations, each carrier has output power of 20 W. In MIMO configurations, each carrier has output power of 40 W (2x20 W). l In actual configuration, only one type of baseband board is selected.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Typical Configurations of UMTS Base Stations (with RFUs) A 3900 series macro base station in UMTS mode can be configured with WRFUs with different power, for example, WRFU 80 W and WRFUd 2x60 W. Table 5-5 and Table 5-6 list the typical configurations of the base stations using different RFUs. Table 5-5 Typical configurations of a UMTS base station using the WRFU 80 W Product Configuration
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
S4/4/4 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 MIMO
S2/2/2 MIMO
S3/3/3 MIMO
S4/4/4 MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WMPT/UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Baseban d processi ng board
WBBPd
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
WBBPf 3/4
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
WRFU of 80 W
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
0
3
6
9
0
3
6
9
Power license (per 20 W)
0
3
6
9
0
6
12
18
Antenna
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Table 5-6 Typical configurations of a UMTS base station using the WRFUd 2x60 W Product Configuration
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
S4/4/4 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 MIMO
S2/2/2 MIMO
S3/3/3 MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Product Configuration
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
S4/4/4 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 MIMO
S2/2/2 MIMO
S3/3/3 MIMO
BTS3900A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPf3/4
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
WRFUd of 2x60 W
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
0
3
6
9
3
6
9
Power license (per 20 W)
0
3
6
9
3
9
15
Antenna
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Typical Configurations of UMTS Base Stations (with RRUs) The following table lists the typical configurations of the DBS3900 in UMTS mode and using the RRU3806 or RRU3826. Table 5-7 Typical configurations of the DBS3900 (with the RRU3806/RRU3826) Product Configuration
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
S4/4/4 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 MIM O
S2/2/2 MIMO
S3/3/3 MIMO
S4/4/4 MIM O
Cabinet (optional)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPTa1/UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Baseban d board
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
WBBPd
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
Product Configuration
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
S4/4/4 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 MIM O
S2/2/2 MIMO
S3/3/3 MIMO
S4/4/4 MIM O
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
RRU3806 80 W
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
0
3
6
9
0
3
6
9
Power license (per 20 W)
0
3
6
9
0
6
12
18
Antenna
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
WBBPf3/ 4
The following table lists the typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) in UMTS mode and using the RRU3806. Table 5-8 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) (with the RRU3806) Product Configuration
O1
O2
O3
O4
Non-MIMO
Non-MIMO
Non-MIMO
Non-MIMO
OMB (Ver.C) cabinet
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
WMPT/UMPTa1/UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
Baseband board
WBBPd
1
1
1
1
WBBPf3/4
1
1
1
1
RRU3806
1
1
1
1
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
0
1
2
3
Power license (per 20 W)
0
1
2
3
Antenna
1
1
1
1
5.1.3 LTE Mode This section describes the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in LTE mode using RFUs or RRUs.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
NOTE
l This table assumes that each channel provides 20 W power. l In actual configuration, only one type of baseband board or RF module is selected.
Typical Configurations of LTE Base Stations (with RFUs) The following table lists the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in LTE mode using LRFUs. Table 5-9 Typical configurations of LTE base stations using LRFUs Product Configuration
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
1
BTS3900L cabinet
S2/2/2 CoFrequency
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
LMPT/UMPTa2/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
Baseba nd board
LBBPc
1
1
1
3
LBBPd
1 (LBBPd1)
1 (LBBPd1)
1 (LBBPd2)
1 (LBBPd2)
1 (UBBPd4)
1 (UBBPd4)
10 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO
2(LBBPd1)/ 1 (LBBPd3)
UBBPd
1 (UBBPd3)
1 (UBBPd3)
2 (UBBPd3)/ 1 (UBBPd5)
LRFU
3
3
3
6
6
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
3
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3
3
6
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
3
3
6
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz
0
3
0
0
3
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
Product Configuration
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
3
Resource Block
150
BB Transmit Channel
S2/2/2 CoFrequency
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
0
0
3
300
300
150
300
0
0
0
6
6
BB Receive Channel
0
0
0
6
6
RF Transmit Channel
0
0
0
6
6
RF Receive Channel
0
0
0
6
6
LTE Multi Carrier (per Carrier)
0
0
3
0
0
Antenna
3
3
3
6
6
10 MHz Bandwidth DL 2x2 MIMO
LTE Base Station Configurations (with RRUs) The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in LTE mode and using the RRU3201. Table 5-10 Typical configurations of LTE base stations using the RRU3201 Product Configuration
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
Cabinet (optional)
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
UMPTa2/UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
Baseband board
LBBPc
1
1
1
3
LBBPd
1
1
1
1
UBBPd
1 (UBBPd3)
1 (UBBPd3)
1 (UBBPd4)
1 (UBBPd4)
3
3
6
6
RRU3201
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
Product Configuration
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz
0
3
0
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
3
0
3
Resource block (required for the LBBPd2)
150
300
150
300
BB transmit channel (required for the LBBPd2)
0
0
6
6
Antenna
3
3
6
6
5.1.4 GU Co-Module This section describes the typical configurations when the GSM and UMTS modes co-exist in the RF modules of a 3900 series base station. NOTE
The power of each WCDMA carrier is configured to 20 W.
GU Co-Module Configurations (with MRFUs) Multimode RFUs can be configured in a 3900 series macro base station that uses the GU separateMPT or G*U co-MPT mode. The typical configurations in these scenarios are listed in Table 5-11 and Table 5-12. Table 5-11 Typical configurations of a GU separate-MPT base station using MRFUs GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
UMTS 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
BTS3900A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WMPT/UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPd/WBBPf
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MRFU/MRFUe/ MRFUd
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
0
3
3
3
0
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
3
3
3
0
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
0
3
6
0
0
3
6
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
Power license (per 20 W)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
Antenna
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Table 5-12 Typical configurations of a G*U co-MPT base station using MRFUs GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UBRIb
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPf
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MRFU/MRFUe/ MRFUd
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
0
3
3
3
0
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
0
3
6
0
0
3
6
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
Power license (per 20 W)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS) (Per UMPT)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Antenna
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GU Dual-Mode Configurations (with RRUs) The RRU3908, RRU3926, or RRU3928 can be configured in a DBS3900 that uses the GU separate-MPT or G*U co-MPT mode. The typical configurations in these scenarios are listed in Table 5-13 and Table 5-14. Table 5-13 Typical configurations of the DBS3900 in separate-MPT mode (with the RRU3908) GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
Cabinet (optional)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WMPT/UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPd/WBBPf
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RRU3908/RRU3929/ RRU3928
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
0
3
3
3
0
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
0
3
6
0
0
3
6
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for MultiMode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
Power license (per 20 W)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
Antenna
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Table 5-14 Typical configurations of the DBS3900 in co-MPT mode (with the RRU3929/RRU3928) GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
Cabinet (optional)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UBRIb
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPf
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RRU3929/RRU3928
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
0
3
3
3
0
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
0
3
6
0
0
3
6
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for MultiMode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
Power license (per 20 W)
0
0
0
0
3
3
3
3
MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Antenna
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
The RRU3929 can be configured in the BTS3900C (Ver.C) that uses the GU separate-MPT or G*U co-MPT mode. The typical configurations in these scenarios are listed in Table 5-15 and Table 5-16.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Table 5-15 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) in separate-MPT mode (with the RRU3929) GSM 900 MHz
O1
O2
O3
O4
O4
WCDMA 900 MHz
O1
O1
O1
O1
O2
OMB (Ver.C) cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
WMPT/UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPd/WBBPf
1
1
1
1
1
RRU3929
1
1
1
1
1
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
1
1
1
1
1
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
0
1
1
1
1
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
0
1
2
2
WCDMA Multi Carrier 1 License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
1
1
1
1
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
0
0
1
Power license (per 20 W)
0
0
0
0
1
Antenna
1
1
1
1
1
Table 5-16 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) in co-MPT mode (with the RRU3929) GSM 900 MHz
O1
O2
O3
O4
O4
WCDMA 900 MHz
O1
O1
O1
O1
O2
OMB (Ver.C) cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 900 MHz
O1
O2
O3
O4
O4
UBRIb
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPd/WBBPf
1
1
1
1
1
RRU3929
1
1
1
1
1
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
1
1
1
1
1
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
1
1
1
1
1
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
0
1
2
2
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
1
1
1
1
1
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
0
0
1
Power license (per 20 W)
0
0
0
0
1
MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS)
1
1
1
1
1
Antenna
1
1
1
1
1
5.1.5 GU Co-BBU This section describes the typical configurations when the GSM and UMTS modes co-exist in a BBU of a 3900 series base station. NOTE
l In non-MIMO configurations, each carrier provides output power of 20 W. In MIMO configurations, each carrier provides output power of 40 W (2x20 W). l In actual configuration, only one type of baseband board or RF module is selected.
Typical Configurations of GU Co-BBU Base Stations (with RFUs) For a 3900 series base station in GU separate-MPT mode, Table 5-17 lists the typical configurations when the WRFU of 80 W is used and Table 5-18 lists the typical configurations when the WRFUd 2x60 W is used. Table 5-17 Typical configurations of a GU co-BBU separate-MPT base station (with the WRFU of 80 W) GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
UMTS 2100M
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
MIMO
MIMO
MIMO
MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WMPT/ UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPd
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
WRFU of 80 W
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
GRFU 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GRFU 1800 MHz
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
0
3
6
9
0
3
6
9
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
0
3
6
9
0
6
12
18
3900 series GRFU transceiver (per TRX)
0
3
6
12
0
3
6
12
Antenna
6
6
9
9
6
6
9
9
Table 5-18 Typical configurations of a GU co-BBU separate-MPT base station (with the WRFUd of 2x60 W) GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
MIMO
MIMO
MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPf
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
WRFUd of 2x60 W
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GRFU 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GRFU 1800 MHz
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
0
3
6
9
0
3
6
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
0
3
6
9
3
9
15
3900 series GRFU 0 transceiver (per TRX)
3
6
12
0
3
6
Antenna
6
9
9
6
6
9
6
Typical Configurations of GU Co-BBU Base Stations (with RRUs) The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 that uses the GU co-BBU mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Table 5-19 Typical configurations of a GU co-BBU separate-MPT base station (with RRUs) GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
UMTS 2100M
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
MIMO
MIMO
MIMO
MIMO
1
1
APM30 H (Ver.B): 2
APM30H (Ver.B): 2
APM30H (Ver.B): 2
APM30H (Ver.B): 2
APM30H (Ver.B): 2
APM30H (Ver.B): 2
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
Cabinet (optional)
APM30 H (Ver.D): 1 BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WMPT/ UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPd
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
RRU3806
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
RRU3008 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
RRU3008 1800 MHz
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
0
3
6
9
0
3
6
9
Power License (per 20 W)
0
3
6
9
0
6
12
18
3900 series RRU3008 transceiver (per TRX)
0
3
6
12
0
3
6
12
Antenna
6
6
9
9
6
6
9
9
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
5.1.6 GL Co-Module This section describes the typical configurations when the GSM and LTE modes co-exist in the RF modules of a 3900 series base station. NOTE
l The following configurations assume that each LTE channel provides 20 W transmit power. l The following configurations assume that each GSM carrier provides 20 W transmit power.
Typical Configurations of GL Co-Module Base Stations (with RFUs) Table 5-20 lists the typical configurations of a GL separate-MPT base station using RFUs. Table 5-21 lists the typical configurations of a GL co-MPT base station using RFUs. Table 5-20 Typical configurations of a GL separate-MPT base station (with RFUs) GSM 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwi dth
20 MHz Bandwi dth
10 MHz Bandwi dth
20 MHz Bandwid th
20 MHz Bandwi dth
10 MHz Bandwi dth
20 MHz Bandwi dth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
10 MHz Bandw idth
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
BTS3900A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPTa2/UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LBBPd2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MRFUd 1800 MHz
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
DL 4x2 MIMO
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz
0
3
0
3
0
3
0
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
3
0
3
0
3
0
3
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
0
3
3
3
0
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
0
3
6
0
0
3
6
Resource Block
150
300
150
300
150
300
150
300
BB Transmit Channel
0
0
0
0
6
6
6
6
Antenna
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
Table 5-21 Typical configurations of a GL co-MPT base station (with RFUs) GSM 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwi dth
20 MHz Bandwi dth
10 MHz Bandwi dth
20 MHz Bandwi dth
10 MHz Bandwi dth
20 MHz Bandwi dth
10 MHz Bandwi dth
20 MHz Bandwi dth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UBRIb
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LBBPd2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MRFUd 1800 MHz
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to 15MHz
0
3
0
3
0
3
0
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
3
0
3
0
3
0
3
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
0
3
3
3
0
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
0
3
6
0
0
3
6
Resource Block
150
300
150
300
150
300
150
300
BB Transmit Channel
0
0
0
0
6
6
6
6
MPT Multi Mode license (LTE) (Per UMPT)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Antenna
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
Typical configurations of a GL base station using RRUs The RRU3929 can be configured in the BTS3900C (Ver.C) that uses the GL separate-MPT or G*L co-MPT mode. The typical configurations in these scenarios are listed in Table 5-22 and Table 5-23.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Table 5-22 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) in separate-MPT mode (with the RRU3929) GSM 1800 MHz
O1
O2
O3
O4
LTE 1800 MHz
O1
O1
O1
O1
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
2x2 MIMO
2x2 MIMO
2x2 MIMO
2x2 MIMO
OMB (Ver.C) cabinet
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
UMPTa2
1
1
1
1
LBBPd2
1
1
1
1
RRU3929
1
1
1
1
GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
1
1
1
1
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
1
1
1
1
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
1
1
1
1
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
1
1
1
1
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz
1
1
1
1
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
1
1
1
1
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
0
1
1
1
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
0
1
2
Resource Block
100
100
100
100
BB Transmit Channel
0
0
0
0
Antenna
1
1
1
1
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Table 5-23 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) in co-MPT mode (with the RRU3929) GSM 1800 MHz
O1
O2
O3
O4
LTE 1800 MHz
O1
O1
O1
O1
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
2x2 MIMO
2x2 MIMO
2x2 MIMO
2x2 MIMO
OMB (Ver.C) cabinet
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
UBRIb
1
1
1
1
LBBPd1
1
1
1
1
RRU3929
1
1
1
1
GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
1
1
1
1
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
1
1
1
1
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
1
1
1
1
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
1
1
1
1
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz
1
1
1
1
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
1
1
1
1
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
0
1
1
1
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
0
1
2
Resource Block
100
100
100
100
BB Transmit Channel
0
0
0
0
MPT Multi Mode license (LTE)
1
1
1
1
Antenna
1
1
1
1
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
5.1.7 GL Co-BBU This section describes the typical configurations when the GSM and LTE modes co-exist in a BBU of a 3900 series base station. NOTE
The following configurations assume that each LTE channel provides 20 W transmit power.
Typical Configurations of GL Co-BBU Base Stations (with RFUs) The following table lists the typical configurations of a 3900 series macro base station that uses the GL co-BBU separate-MPT mode. Table 5-24 Typical configurations of a GL co-BBU separate-MPT base station (with RFUs) GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
20 MHz Bandwidt h
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
1
1
2
2
2
2
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
LMPT/UMPTa2/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LBBPc/LBBPd1
1
1
1
1
1
3
GRFU 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
GRFU 1800 MHz
0
0
3
3
3
3
LRFU
3
3
3
3
6
6
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
DL 2x2 MIMO
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
20 MHz Bandwidt h
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
3
3
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz
0
3
0
3
0
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
3
0
3
0
3
3900 series GRFU transceiver (per TRX)
0
3
6
12
6
12
Antenna
6
6
9
9
9
9
DL 2x2 MIMO
Typical Configurations of GL Co-BBU Base Stations (with RRUs) The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 that uses the GL co-BBU separate-MPT mode.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Table 5-25 Typical configurations of a GL co-BBU separate-MPT base station (with RRUs) GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwid th
20 MHz Bandwidt h
10 MHz Bandwidt h
20 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
DL 4x2 MIMO
1
1
APM30H (Ver.B): 2
APM30H (Ver.B): 2
APM30H (Ver.B): 2
APM30H (Ver.B): 2
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
Cabinet (optional)
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
GTMU
1
1
1
1
1
1
LMPT/UMPTa2/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LBBPc/LBBPd1
1
1
1
1
1
3
RRU3008 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
RRU3008 1800 MHz
0
0
3
3
3
3
RRU3201
3
3
3
3
6
6
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
3
3
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz
3
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15MHz
0
3
0
3
0
3
Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
3
0
3
0
3
3900 series RRU3008 transceiver (per TRX)
0
3
6
12
6
12
Antenna
6
6
9
9
9
9
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
5.1.8 GUL Triple Mode This section describes the typical configurations a 3900 series base station in triple mode. NOTE
l In non-MIMO UMTS configurations, each carrier provides output power of 20 W. In MIMO configurations, each carrier provides output power of 40 W (2x20 W). l The following configurations assume that each LTE channel provides 20 W transmit power.
Typical Configurations of GUL Base Stations (with RFUs) Table 5-26, Table 5-27, and Table 5-28 list typical configurations of GUL base stations using RFUs. Table 5-26 Typical configurations of a separate-MPT GUL base station GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
2
2
2
2
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
BBU
2
2
2
2
GTMU
1
1
1
1
WMPT/UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
LMPT/UMPTa2/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
LBBPc
1
1
1
1
MRFU 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
GRFU 1800 MHz
0
3
3
3
WRFU 2100 MHz
3
3
3
3
LRFU 2600 MHz
3
3
3
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
3
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
0
0
3
Multiple Transceiver (Per TRX)
0
6
9
9
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
3
3
Power license (per 20 W)
3
3
6
9
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
3
3
3
6
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15 MHz
0
0
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
0
3
3
Antenna
9
12
12
12
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Table 5-27 Typical configurations of GU+L(G)/GL+U(G) base stations GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
2
2
2
2
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
BBU
2
2
2
2
GTMU
1
1
1
1
UMPTa1/UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
UCIU
1
1
1
1
WBBPf
1
2
2
2
UMPTa2/UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
LBBPd2
2
2
2
2
MRFU 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
MRFU 1800 MHz
3
3
3
3
WRFU 2100 MHz
3
3
3
3
LRFU 2600 MHz
3
3
3
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
6
6
6
6
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
3
3
6
9
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
3
3
Power license (per 20 W)
3
3
6
9
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
3
3
3
6
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
3
3
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz
6
6
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz
6
6
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15 MHz
0
0
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
0
6
6
Resource Block
300
300
600
600
Antenna
12
12
12
12
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Table 5-28 Typical configurations of G*U*L base stations GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
2
2
2
2
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
BBU
1
1
1
1
UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
UBRIb
2
2
2
2
WBBPf
1
2
2
3
LBBPd2
2
2
2
2
MRFU 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
MRFU 1800 MHz
3
3
3
3
WRFU 2100 MHz
3
3
3
3
LRFU 2600 MHz
3
3
3
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
6
6
6
6
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
3
3
6
9
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
3
3
Power license (per 20 W)
3
3
6
9
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
3
3
3
6
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz
6
6
6
6
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz
6
6
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15 MHz
0
0
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
0
6
6
Resource Block
300
300
600
600
MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS) (Per UMPT)
1
1
1
1
MPT Multi Mode license (LTE) (Per UMPT)
1
1
1
1
Antenna
12
12
12
12
Typical Configurations of GUL Base Stations (with RRUs) Table 5-29 lists typical configurations of separate-MPT GU+L(G) base stations using RRUs. Table 5-30 lists typical configurations of co-MPT G*U*L base stations using RRUs.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Table 5-29 Typical configurations of GU+L(G) base stations using RRUs GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
APM30H (Ver.C): 2
APM30H (Ver.C): 2
APM30H (Ver.C): 2
APM30H (Ver.C): 2
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
BBU
2
2
2
2
GTMU
1
1
1
1
WMPT/UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
WBBPd/WBBPf
1
2
2
3
UMPTa2/UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
LBBPc/LBBPd1
1
1
1
1
UCIU
1
1
1
1
RRU3908 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
RRU3929 1800 MHz
0
3
3
3
WRRU 2100 MHz
3
3
3
3
LRRU 2600 MHz
3
3
3
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
3
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
0
0
3
Cabinet (optional)
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
Multiple Transceiver (Per TRX)
0
6
9
9
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
3
3
Power license (per 20 W)
3
3
6
9
Multi Carrier License
3
3
3
6
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15 MHz
0
0
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
0
3
3
Antenna
9
12
12
12
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Table 5-30 Typical configurations of G*U*L base stations GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
l APM30H (Ver.C): 2
l APM30H (Ver.C): 2
l APM30H (Ver.C): 2
l APM30H (Ver.C): 2
l APM30H (Ver.D): 1
l APM30H (Ver.D): 1
l APM30H (Ver.D): 1
l APM30H (Ver.D): 1
BBU
1
1
1
1
UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
UBRIb
2
2
2
2
WBBPf
1
2
2
3
LBBPd2
2
2
2
2
RRU3929 900 MHz
3
3
3
3
RRU3929 1800 MHz
3
3
3
3
RRU3829 2100 MHz
3
3
3
3
RRU3201 2600 MHz
3
3
3
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
GSM/LTE Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
3
Cabinet (optional)
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
6
6
6
6
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
3
3
6
9
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
0
3
3
Power license (per 20 W)
3
3
6
9
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
3
3
3
6
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth 0 MHz to 5 MHz
6
6
6
6
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S1/1/1 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S2/2/2 NonMIMO
S3/3/3 NonMIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
Carrier Bandwidth 5 MHz to 10 MHz
6
6
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 10 MHz to 15 MHz
0
0
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth 15 MHz to 20 MHz
0
0
6
6
Resource Block
300
300
600
600
MPT Multi Mode license(LTE)
1
1
1
1
MPT Multi Mode license (UMTS)
1
1
1
1
Antenna
12
12
12
12
Typical configurations of GUL base stations using RFUs and RRUs The following table lists typical configurations of GUL base stations using RFUs and RRUs.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Table 5-31 Typical configurations of GUL base stations using RFUs and RRUs LTE 800 MHz
S1/1/1
N/A
S1/1/1
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 Non-MIMO
S2/2/2 Non-MIMO
S2/2/2 Non-MIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 Non-MIMO
S2/2/2 MIMO
S3/3/3 MIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
2
2
2
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
BBU
2
2
2
GTMU
1
1
1
WMPT/UMPTa1/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
WBBPd
2
3
4
LMPT/UMPTa2/ UMPTb1
1
1
1
LBBPc
2
1
2
MRFU 900 MHz
3
3
3
GRFU 1800 MHz
3
3
3
WRFU 2100 MHz
3
6
6
LRFU 2600 MHz
3
0
0
RRU 2600 MHz
0
3
3
RRU 800 MHz
3
0
3
GSM/UMTS Dual Mode license (per sector)
3
3
3
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
LTE 800 MHz
S1/1/1
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
N/A
S1/1/1
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 Non-MIMO
S2/2/2 Non-MIMO
S2/2/2 Non-MIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 Non-MIMO
S2/2/2 MIMO
S3/3/3 MIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
GSM multiple transceiver for the 2nd TRX of multimode module
3
3
3
GSM multiple transceiver for multimode module
0
0
3
3900 series GRFU transceiver (per TRX)
6
9
9
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
3
3
3
WCDMA Multi Carrier License for Multi-Mode Module (per Carrier)
0
3
3
Power license (per 20 W)
3
6
15
Multi Carrier License (per Carrier)
3
3
6
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
6
3
6
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
6
3
6
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
6
3
6
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 MHz to 15 MHz
3
3
6
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 MHz to 20 MHz
3
3
6
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
LTE 800 MHz
S1/1/1
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
N/A
S1/1/1
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
GSM 900 MHz
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
WCDMA 900 MHz
S1/1/1 Non-MIMO
S2/2/2 Non-MIMO
S2/2/2 Non-MIMO
GSM 1800 MHz
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S4/4/4
WCDMA 2100 MHz
S2/2/2 Non-MIMO
S2/2/2 MIMO
S3/3/3 MIMO
LTE 2600 MHz
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
12
12
12
Antenna
5.1.9 GU Co-BBP This section describes the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in GU co-BBP mode. The following table lists the typical configurations of a base station using GU co-MPT and coBBP and configured with WRFUs of 80 W. Table 5-32 Typical configurations of a base station using GU co-MPT and co-BBP and configured with WRFUs of 80 W GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
GSM 1800 MHz
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
N/A
N/A
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
UMTS 2100 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S3/3/3
S4/4/4
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
NonMIMO
MIMO
MIMO
MIMO
MIMO
BTS3900L cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BTS3900A cabinet
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
BTS3900 cabinet
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
BTS3900AL cabinet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
GSM 900 MHz
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UBBPd1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UBBPd2
-
-
-
1
-
-
-
1
WRFU (80 W)
3
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
GRFU 900M
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
GRFU 1800M
0
0
3
3
0
0
3
3
Multi Carrier License
0
3
6
9
0
3
6
9
Power License (per 20 W)
0
3
6
9
0
6
12
18
3900 series GRFU transceiver (per TRX)
0
3
6
12
0
3
6
12
UBBP FirstMode license (GSM) (Per UBBP)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UBBP MultiMode license (UMTS) (Per UBBP)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Antenna
6
6
9
9
6
6
9
9
(per Carrier)
5.1.10 Typical Configurations of an AAU3910 in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P Scenarios This section describes the typical configurations of an AAU3910 in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P scenarios. The following table describes the typical configurations of an AAU3910 that is in 2T4R mode and supports 2x40 W output power in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P scenarios.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Table 5-33 Typical configurations in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P scenarios (2T4R 2x40 W) LTE Configuration
S1/1/1
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S2/2/2
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
10 MHz Bandwidth
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
DL 2x2 MIMO
Cabinet (optional)
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
APM30H (Ver.D): 1
BBU
1
1
1
1
UMPTa2
1
1
1
1
LBBPd1
1
1
-
-
LBBPd2
-
-
1
1
AAU3910 2.6 A+1.8 P/ 2.1 P
3
3
3
3
RF Output Power (per 20 W)
3
3
6
6
Carrier Bandwidth - 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 5 MHz to 10 MHz
3
3
3
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 10 0 MHz to 15 MHz
3
0
3
Carrier Bandwidth - 15 0 MHz to 20 MHz
3
0
3
Resource block (required for the LBBPd2)
0
0
150
300
BB transmit channel (required for the LBBPd2)
0
0
6
6
Antenna
0
0
0
0
Baseband board
5.1.11 Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+ (790~960) P+(1710~2690) P Scenarios This section describes the typical configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+ (790~960) P +(1710~2690) P scenarios.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
The following table lists the typical configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+ (790~960) P +(1710~2690) P scenarios. Table 5-34 Typical configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+ (790~960) P+(1710~2690) P scenarios WCDMA Configuration
S1/1/1
S2/2/2
S4/4/4
S2/2/2
S4/4/4
S2/2/2
S4/4/4
NonMIM O
NonMIM O
NonMIM O
MIMO
MIMO
2x20W/ C
2x10W/ C
20W/ C
20W/ C
20W/ C
2T4R Config uration s
2T4R Config uratio ns
2x20W/ C
2x10W /C
S2/2/2 /2/2/2
S4/4/4/ 4/4/4
2T2R Confi gurati ons
2T2R Config uration s
2x10 W/C
2x5 W
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPTb1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WBBPf4
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
4
AAU3902
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Multi Carrier License
0
3
9
3
9
3
9
9
21
0
3
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
AAS Virtual Four Uplink Channels (per RU)
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
0
0
AAS Vertical Multiple Sector (per RU)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
3
(per Carrier) Power License (per 20W)
5.1.12 Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 1800 A+ (790~960) P+(1710~2690) P Scenarios This section describes the typical configurations of an AAU3902 in 1800 A+ (790~960) P +(1710~2690) P scenarios.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
Table 5-35 Typical configurations of an AAU3902 in 1800 A+ (790~960) P+(1710~2690) P scenarios LTE and GSM
LOS1/1/ 1
LOS2/2/ 2
LOS1/1/ 1
Config uration
2x2 MIM O
2x2 MIM O
4x4 MIM O
2x40 W
2x20 W
4x20 W
LOS2/2/2 4x4 MIM O 4x10 W
GLS6/6/6 +S1/1/1
GLS4/4/4 +S1/1/1
LO S2/2/2/ 2/2/2
G-6trx, 10 W per carrier
G-4trx, 10 W per carrier
2x2 MIMO
L-2x2 MIMO
L-4x4 MIMO
2x10 W
4x10 W
2x10 W
GL S4/4/4+ S1/1/1/1 /1/1, 10 W 2x2 MIMO 2x10 W
BBU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UMPTa 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UBBPd1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
UBBPd3
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
UBBPd5
0
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
AAU390 2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Multi Carrier
0
3
0
3
15
9
9
12
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
0
0
3
3
0
3
0
0
Impact on license manage ment (per carrier) Power License (per 20 W) AAS Virtual Four Uplink Channel s (per RU)
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
SingleRAN 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles
5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
LTE and GSM
LOS1/1/ 1
LOS2/2/ 2
LOS1/1/ 1
Config uration
2x2 MIM O
2x2 MIM O
4x4 MIM O
2x40 W
2x20 W
4x20 W
AAS Vertical Multiple
0
0
0
LOS2/2/2 4x4 MIM O 4x10 W
0
GLS6/6/6 +S1/1/1
GLS4/4/4 +S1/1/1
LO S2/2/2/ 2/2/2
G-6trx, 10 W per carrier
G-4trx, 10 W per carrier
2x2 MIMO
L-2x2 MIMO
L-4x4 MIMO
2x10 W
4x10 W
0
0
2x10 W
GL S4/4/4+ S1/1/1/1 /1/1, 10 W 2x2 MIMO 2x10 W
3
3
Sectors (per RU)
5.2 Capacity Expansion Principles This section describes the capacity expansion principles for 3900 series base stations. The following table lists the capacity expansion principles for 3900 series base stations. Table 5-36 Capacity expansion principles Expansion Item
Principle
Radio frequency capacity
If the capacity to be expanded does not exceed the hardware capability, first expand the multi-carrier license and power, and then add RFUs and RRUs.
Baseband capacity
If the capacity to be expanded does not exceed the hardware capability, first expand the license, and then add baseband boards.
Transmission capacity
If more than four E1s/T1s or more than one FE electrical or optical port is required, add UTRP boards to provide more transmission ports.
NOTE
For the typical configurations after capacity expansion, see 5.1 Typical Configurations.
Issue 13 (2015-08-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232